US20110206606A1 - Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation - Google Patents

Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20110206606A1
US20110206606A1 US12/975,087 US97508710A US2011206606A1 US 20110206606 A1 US20110206606 A1 US 20110206606A1 US 97508710 A US97508710 A US 97508710A US 2011206606 A1 US2011206606 A1 US 2011206606A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
radiopharmaceutical composition
stabilizer
acid
cysteine
stabilized radiopharmaceutical
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US12/975,087
Inventor
Jianqing Chen
Karen E. Linder
Edmund R. Marinelli
Edmund Metcalfe
Adrian D. Nunn
Rolf E. Swenson
Michael F. Tweedle
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Bracco Imaging SpA
Original Assignee
Bracco Imaging SpA
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Bracco Imaging SpA filed Critical Bracco Imaging SpA
Priority to US12/975,087 priority Critical patent/US20110206606A1/en
Assigned to BRACCO IMAGING S.P.A. reassignment BRACCO IMAGING S.P.A. ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: CHEN, JIANQING, LINDER, KAREN E., MARINELLI, EDMUND R., METCALFE, EDMUND, NUNN, ADRIAN, SWENSON, ROLF E., TWEEDLE, MICHAEL
Publication of US20110206606A1 publication Critical patent/US20110206606A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • A61K51/12Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo characterised by a special physical form, e.g. emulsion, microcapsules, liposomes, characterized by a special physical form, e.g. emulsions, dispersions, microcapsules
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K51/00Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo
    • A61K51/02Preparations containing radioactive substances for use in therapy or testing in vivo characterised by the carrier, i.e. characterised by the agent or material covalently linked or complexing the radioactive nucleus
    • A61K51/04Organic compounds
    • A61K51/08Peptides, e.g. proteins, carriers being peptides, polyamino acids, proteins
    • A61K51/088Peptides, e.g. proteins, carriers being peptides, polyamino acids, proteins conjugates with carriers being peptides, polyamino acids or proteins
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00Antineoplastic agents

Definitions

  • This invention relates to stabilizers that improve the radiostability of radiotherapeutic and radiodiagnostic compounds, and formulations containing them.
  • it relates to stabilizers useful in the preparation and stabilization of targeted radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic compounds, and, in a preferred embodiment, to the preparation and stabilization of radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic compounds that are targeted to the Gastrin Releasing Peptide Receptor (GRP-Receptor).
  • GRP-Receptor Gastrin Releasing Peptide Receptor
  • Radiolabeled compounds designed for use as radiodiagnostic agents are generally prepared with a gamma-emitting isotope as the radiolabel. These gamma photons penetrate water and body tissues readily and can have a range in tissue or air of many centimeters. In general, such radiodiagnostic compounds do not cause significant damage to the organ systems that are imaged using these agents. This is because the gamma photons given off have no mass or charge and the amount of radioactive material that is injected is limited to the quantity required to obtain a diagnostic image, generally in the range of about 3 to 50 mCi, depending on the isotope and imaging agent used. This quantity is small enough to obtain useful images without significant radiation dose to the patient. Radionuclides such as 99m Tc, 111 In, 123 I, 67 Ga and 64 Cu have been used for this purpose.
  • radiolabeled compounds designed for use as radiotherapeutic agents are generally labeled with an Auger-, beta- or an alpha-emitting isotope, which may optionally also give off gamma photons.
  • Radionuclides such as 90 Y, 177 Lu, 149 Pm, 153 Sm, 109 Pd, 67 Cu, 166 Ho, 131 I, 32 P, 186/188 Re, 105 Rh, 211 At, 225 Ac, 47 Sc, 213 Bi, and others, are potentially useful for radiotherapy.
  • the +3 metal ions of the lanthanide isotopes are of particular interest, and include 177 Lu (relatively low energy ⁇ -emitter), 149 Pm, 153 Sm (medium energy) and 166 Ho (high energy).
  • 90 Y also forms a +3 metal ion, and has coordination chemistry that is similar to that of the lanthanides.
  • the coordination chemistry of the lanthanides is well developed and well known to those skilled in the art.
  • the ionizing radiation given off from compounds labeled with these radioisotopes is of an appropriate energy to damage cells and tissue in sites where the radiolabelled compound has localized.
  • the radiation emitted can either damage cellular components in the target tissue directly, or can cause water in tissues to form free radicals. These radicals are very reactive and can damage proteins and DNA.
  • the hydroxyl radical [OH*] is particularly destructive. This radical can also combine with itself to form hydrogen peroxide, which is a strong oxidizer.
  • the radiotherapeutic or radiodiagnostic compound e.g., a tumor, bone metastasis, blood cells or other targeted organ or organ system
  • a cytostatic or cytotoxic effect e.g., a tumor, bone metastasis, blood cells or other targeted organ or organ system
  • the key factor for successful radiotherapy is the delivery of enough radiation dose to the targeted tissue (e.g, tumor cells, etc.) to cause a cytotoxic or tumoricidal effect, without causing significant or intolerable side effects.
  • the key factor is delivery of sufficient radiation to the target tissue to image it without causing significant or intolerable side effects.
  • Alpha particles dissipate a large amount of energy within one or two cell diameters, as their range of penetration in tissues is only ⁇ 50 ⁇ M. This can cause intense local damage, especially if the radiolabeled compound has been internalized into the nucleus of the cell.
  • radiotherapeutic compounds labeled with Auger-electron emitters such as 111 In have a very short range and can have potent biological effects at the desired site of action.
  • the emissions from therapeutic beta-emitting isotopes such as 177 Lu or 90 Y have somewhat longer ranges in tissue, but again, most of the damage produced occurs within a few millimeters or centimeters from the site of localization.
  • radiolytic damage to the radiolabeled compound itself can be a serious problem during the preparation, purification, storage and/or shipping of a radiolabeled radiotherapeutic or radiodiagnostic compound, prior to its intended use.
  • radiolytic damage can cause, for example, release of the radioisotope [e.g., by dehalogenation of radioiodinated antibodies or decomposition of the chelating moiety designed to hold the radiometal], or it can damage the targeting molecule that is required to deliver the targeted agent to its intended target.
  • Both types of damage are highly undesirable as they can potentially cause the release of unbound isotope, e.g., free radioiodine or unchelated radiometal to the thyroid, bone and other organs, or cause a decrease or abolishment of targeting ability as a result of radiolytic damage to the targeting molecule, such as a receptor-binding region of a targeting peptide or radiolabeled antibody. Radioactivity that does not become associated with its target tissue may be responsible for unwanted side effects.
  • GRP Gastrin Releasing Peptide
  • Radiolabeled with diagnostic and radiotherapeutic radionuclides such as 111 In and 177 Lu
  • Compounds A and B have been shown to have high affinity for GRP receptors, both in vitro and in vivo.
  • these compounds can undergo significant radiolytic damage that is induced by the radioactive label if these radiolabeled complexes are prepared without concomitant or subsequent addition of one or more radiostabilizers (compounds that protect against radiolytic damage).
  • This result is not surprising, as the hydroxyl and superoxide radicals generated by the interaction of ⁇ -particles with water are highly oxidizing. Radiolytic damage to the methionine (Met) residue in these peptides is the most facile mode of decomposition, possibly resulting in a methionine sulfoxide derivative.
  • radical scavengers or antioxidants are typically used. These are compounds that react rapidly with, e.g., hydroxyl radicals and superoxide, thus preventing them from reaction with the radiopharmaceutical of interest or reagents for its preparation.
  • WO 200260491 A2 20020808] state that diagnostic and therapeutic radiopharmaceutical compositions radiolabeled with 125 I, 131 I, 211 At, 47 Sc, 67 Cu, 72 Ga, 90 Y, 153 Sm, 159 Gd, 165 Dy, 166 Ho, 175 Yb, 177 Lu, 212 Bi, 213 Bi, 68 Ga, 99m Tc, 111 In and 123 I can be stabilized by the addition of a hydrophilic thioether, and that the amino acid methionine, a hydrophilic thioether, is especially useful for this purpose.
  • radiostabilizers In order to identify suitable antioxidant radical scavengers that might be useful for the radiostabilization of GRP-receptor binding radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic compounds, several studies were performed. One or more potential radiostabilizers was added after complex formation (a two-vial formulation) or they were added directly to the reaction mixture prior to complexation with a radiometal (or both). Ideally, the radiostabilizer should be able to be added directly to the formulation without significantly decreasing the radiochemical purity (RCP) of the product, as such a formulation has the potential to be a single-vial kit.
  • RCP radiochemical purity
  • the radical scavengers identified as a result of these studies have general utility in formulations for the preparation of compounds used for a variety of radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic applications, and may be useful to stabilize compounds radiolabeled with a variety of isotopes, e.g., 99m Tc, 186/188 Re, 111 In, 90 Y, 177 Lu, 213 Bi, 225 Ac, 166 Ho and others.
  • the primary focus of the examples in this application is the radiostabilization of GRP-binding peptides, and in particular, the radioprotection of methionine residues in these molecules.
  • the stabilizers identified should have applicability to a wide range of radiolabeled peptides, peptoids, small molecules, proteins, antibodies, and antibody fragments and the like. They are useful for the radioprotection of any compound that has a residue or residues that are particularly sensitive to radiolytic damage, such as, for example, tryptophan (oxidation of the indole ring), tyrosine (oxidative dimerization, or other oxidation), histidine, cysteine (oxidation of thiol group) and to a lesser extent serine, threonine, glutamic acid, and aspartic acid. Unusual amino acids commonly used in peptides or drugs that contain sensitive functional groups (indoles, imidazoles, thiazoles, furans, thiophenes and other heterocycles) could also be protected.
  • a radiolysis stabilizing solution containing a mixture of the following ingredients is added to the radiolabeled compound immediately following the radiolabeling reaction: gentisic acid, ascorbic acid, human serum albumin, benzyl alcohol, a physiologically acceptable buffer or salt solution at a pH of about 4.5 to about 8.5, and one or more amino acids selected from methionine, selenomethionine, selenocysteine, or cysteine).
  • the physiologically acceptable buffer or salt solution is preferably selected from phosphate, citrate, or acetate buffers or physiologically acceptable sodium chloride solutions or a mixture thereof, at a molarity of from about 0.02M to about 0.2M.
  • the reagent benzyl alcohol is a key component in this formulation and serves two purposes. For compounds that have limited solubility, one of its purposes is to solubilize the radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic targeted compound in the reaction solution, without the need for added organic solvents. Its second purpose is to provide a bacteriostatic effect. This is important, as solutions that contain the radiostabilizers of the invention are expected to have long post-reconstitution stability, so the presence of a bacteriostat is critical in order to maintain sterility.
  • the amino acids methionine, selenomethionine, cysteine, and selenocysteine play a special role in preventing radiolytic damage to methionyl residues in targeted molecules that are stabilized with this radiostabilizing combination.
  • M is a physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state, such as Mg 2+ or Ca 2+
  • R1 and R2 have the same definition as described above.
  • reagents can either be added directly into reaction mixtures during radiolabeled complex preparation, or added after complexation is complete, or both.
  • the compound 1-Pyrrolidine Dithiocarbamic Acid Ammonium salt (PDTC) proved most efficacious as a stabilizer, when either added directly to the reaction mixture or added after complex formation. These results were unexpected, as the compound has not been reported for use as a stabilizer for radiopharmaceuticals prior to these studies. Dithiocarbamates, and PDTC in particular, have the added advantage of serving to scavenge adventitious trace metals in the reaction mixture.
  • formulations contain stabilizers that are water soluble organic selenium compounds wherein the selenium is in the oxidation state +2.
  • stabilizers that are water soluble organic selenium compounds wherein the selenium is in the oxidation state +2.
  • amino acid compounds selenomethionine, and selenocysteine and their esters and amide derivatives and dipeptides and tri peptides thereof which can either be added directly to the reaction mixture during radiolabeled complex preparation, or following complex preparation.
  • the flexibility of having these stabilizers in the vial at the time of labeling or in a separate vial extends the utility of this invention for manufacturing radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic kits.
  • the ascorbate is most preferably added after complexation is complete. Alternatively, it can be used as a component of the stabilizing formulation described above.
  • a fourth approach involves the use of water soluble sulfur-containing compounds wherein the sulfur in the +2 oxidation state.
  • Preferred thiol compounds include derivatives of cysteine, mercaptothanol, and dithiolthreotol. These reagents are particularly preferred due to their ability to reduce oxidized forms of methionine residues (e.g., methionine oxide residues) back to methionyl residues, thus restoring oxidative damage that has occurred as a result of radiolysis. With these thiol compounds, it is highly efficacious to use these stabilizing reagents in combination with sodium ascorbate or other pharmaceutically acceptable forms of ascorbic acid and its derivatives.
  • the ascorbate is most preferably added after complexation is complete.
  • the stabilizers and stabilizer combinations may be used to improve the radiolytic stability of targeted radiopharmaceuticals, comprising peptides, non-peptidic small molecules, radiolabeled proteins, radiolabeled antibodies and fragments thereof. These stabilizers are particularly useful with the class of GRP-binding compounds described herein.
  • FIG. 1 shows the structure of Compound A.
  • FIG. 2 shows the structure of Compound B.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates the results of an HPLC analysis of a mixture of 177 Lu-A with 2.5 mg/mL L-Methionine over 5 days at room temperature at a radioconcentration of 25 mCi/mL. [50 mCi total].
  • FIG. 3A is a radiochromatogram of a reaction mixture for the preparation of 177 Lu-A, which was initially formed in >98% yield.
  • FIG. 3B is radiochromatogram of [ 177 Lu-A], 25 mCi/mL, after five days at room temperature, demonstrating complete radiolytic destruction of the desired compound.
  • the radiostabilizer added (5 mg/mL L-Methionine) was clearly insufficient for the level of radioprotection required.
  • FIG. 4 is an HPLC trace [radiodetection] showing that 177 Lu-B (104 mCi) has >99% RCP for 5 days when diluted 1:1 with radiolysis protecting solution that was added after the complex was formed.
  • FIG. 5 is an HPLC trace [radiodetection] showing that 177 Lu-A has >95% RCP for 5 days at a concentration of 55 mCi/2 mL if 1 mL of radiolysis protecting solution is added after the complex was formed.
  • FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B show the structure of the methionine sulfoxide derivative of 177 Lu-A ( FIG. 6A ) and methionine sulfoxide derivative of 111 In-B ( FIG. 6B ).
  • FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B show stabilizer studies 177 Lu-A ( FIG. 7A ) and 177 Lu-B ( FIG. 7B ). Radioactivity traces are shown from a study to compare the radiostabilizing effect of different amino acids, when added to 177 Lu-A ( FIG. 7A ) and 177 Lu-B ( FIG. 7B ) at an amino acid concentration of 6.6 mg/mL in 10 mM Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline, pH 7.0 [PBS], and a radioactivity concentration of 20 mCi/mL, after 48 hours of storage at room temperature. A total of 3.5 mCi of 177 Lu was added to each vial. A full description of the experimental procedure is given in Example 1.
  • FIG. 8 shows an HPLC trace [radiodetection] showing the radiostability of 177 Lu-A over 5 days at room temperature at a radioconcentration of 25 mCi/mL in presence of 2.5 mg/mL L-methionine (50 mCi total). The details of this study are given in Example 2.
  • FIG. 9 shows an HPLC trace [radiodetection] showing the stability of 177 Lu-B at a concentration of 50 mCi/2 mL in a radiolysis protecting solution containing L-methionine. The details of this study are given in Example 4.
  • FIGS. 10A-C show radiochromatograms and UV chromatograms comparing samples with and without 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt in the reaction buffer and containing zinc as a contaminant metal during the reaction of 177 Lu-B.
  • the experimental procedure for this study is given in Example 20.
  • the isotope is a non-metal, such as 123 I, 131 I or 18 F, and is either coupled directly to the rest of the molecule or is bound to a linker.
  • the radioisotope used is a metal, it is generally incorporated into a metal chelator.
  • metal chelator refers to a molecule that forms a complex with a metal atom. For radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic applications it is generally preferred that said complex is stable under physiological conditions. That is, the metal will remain complexed to the chelator backbone in vivo.
  • a metal chelator is a molecule that complexes to a radionuclide metal to form a metal complex that is stable under physiological conditions and which also has at least one reactive functional group for conjugation with a targeting molecule, a spacer, or a linking group, as defined below.
  • the metal chelator M may be any of the metal chelators known in the art for complexing a medically useful metal ion or radionuclide.
  • the metal chelator may or may not be complexed with a metal radionuclide.
  • the metal chelator can include an optional spacer such as a single amino acid (e.g., Gly) which does not complex with the metal, but which creates a physical separation between the metal chelator and the linker.
  • the metal chelators of the invention may include, for example, linear, macrocyclic, terpyridine, and N 3 S, N 2 S 2 , or N 4 chelators (see also, U.S. Pat. No. 4,647,447, U.S. Pat. No. 4,957,939, U.S. Pat. No. 4,963,344, U.S. Pat. No. 5,367,080, U.S. Pat. No. 5,364,613, U.S. Pat. No. 5,021,556, U.S. Pat. No. 5,075,099, U.S. Pat. No.
  • N 3 S chelators are described in PCT/CA94/00395, PCT/CA94/00479, PCT/CA95/00249 and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,662,885; 5,976,495; and 5,780,006, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
  • the chelator may also include derivatives of the chelating ligand mercapto-acetyl-glycyl-glycyl-glycine (MAG3), which contains an N 3 S, and N 2 S 2 systems such as MAMA (monoamidemonoaminedithiols), DADS (N 2 S diaminedithiols), CODADS and the like.
  • MAMA monoamidemonoaminedithiols
  • DADS N 2 S diaminedithiols
  • CODADS CODADS
  • the metal chelator may also include complexes known as boronic acid adducts of technetium and rhenium dioximes, such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,183,653; 5,387,409; and 5,118,797, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein, in their entirety.
  • Examples of preferred chelators include, but are not limited to, derivatives of diethylenetriamine pentaacetic acid (DTPA), 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclotetradecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid (DOTA), 1-substituted 1,4,7,-tricarboxymethyl 1,4,7,10 tetraazacyclododecane triacetic acid (DO3A), derivatives of the 1-1-(1-carboxy-3-(p-nitrophenyl)propyl-1,4,7,10 tetraazacyclododecane triacetate (PA-DOTA) and MeO-DOTA, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), and 1,4,8,11-tetraazacyclotetradecane-1,4,8,11-tetraacetic acid (TETA), derivatives of 3,3,9,9-Tetramethyl-4,8-diazaundecane-2,10-dione dioxime (PnAO);
  • Additional chelating ligands are ethylenebis-(2-hydroxy-phenylglycine) (EHPG), and derivatives thereof, including 5-C1-EHPG, 5-Br-EHPG, 5-Me-EHPG, 5-t-Bu-EHPG, and 5-sec-Bu-EHPG; benzodiethylenetriamine pentaacetic acid (benzo-DTPA) and derivatives thereof, including dibenzo-DTPA, phenyl-DTPA, diphenyl-DTPA, benzyl-DTPA, and dibenzyl-DTPA; bis-2 (hydroxybenzyl)-ethylene-diaminediacetic acid (HBED) and derivatives thereof; the class of macrocyclic compounds which contain at least 3 carbon atoms, more preferably at least 6, and at least two heteroatoms (O and/or N), which macrocyclic compounds can consist of one ring, or two or three rings joined together at the hetero ring elements, e.g., benzo-DOTA, dibenzo-DOTA,
  • Particularly preferred metal chelators include those of Formula 1, 2 and 3a and 3b (for 111 In, 90 Y, and radioactive lanthanides, such as, for example 177 Lu, 153 Sm, and 166 Ho) and those of Formula 4, 5 and 6 (for radioactive 99m Tc, 186 Re, and 188 Re) set forth below.
  • Specific metal chelators of Formula 6 include N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys; and other variations thereof.
  • Spacers which do not actually complex with the metal radionuclide such as an extra single amino acid Gly may be attached to these metal chelators (e.g., N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys-Gly; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly).
  • metal chelators e.g., N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys-Gly; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly.
  • Other useful metal chelators such as all of those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
  • 6,334,996 are also incorporated by reference (e.g., Dimethylgly-L-t-Butylgly-L-Cys-Gly; Dimethylgly-D-t-Butylgly-L-Cys-Gly; Dimethylgly-L-t-Butylgly-L-Cys, etc.).
  • sulfur protecting groups such as Acm (acetamidomethyl), trityl or other known alkyl, aryl, acyl, alkanoyl, aryloyl, mercaptoacyl and organothiol groups may be attached to the cysteine amino acid of these metal chelators.
  • useful metal chelators include:
  • R is hydrogen or alkyl, preferably methyl.
  • R 1 and R 2 are as defined in U.S. Pat. No. 6,143,274, incorporated by reference herein its entirety.
  • X is either CH 2 or O
  • Y is either C 1 -C 10 branched or unbranched alkyl
  • Y is aryl, aryloxy, arylamino, arylaminoacyl
  • Y is arylalkyl—where the alkyl group or groups attached to the aryl group are C 1 -C 10 branched or unbranched alkyl groups, C 1 -C 10 branched or unbranched hydroxy or polyhydroxyalkyl groups or polyalkoxyalkyl or polyhydroxy-polyalkoxyalkyl groups
  • J is C( ⁇ O)—, OC( ⁇ O)—, SO 2 —, NC( ⁇ O)—, NC( ⁇ S)—, N(Y), NC( ⁇ NCH 3 )—
  • the metal chelator includes cyclic or acyclic polyaminocarboxylic acids such as DOTA (1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid), DTPA (diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid), DTPA-bismethylamide, DTPA-bismorpholineamide, DO3A N-[[4,7,10-Tris(carboxymethyl)-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododec-1-yl]acetyl], HP-DO3A, DO3A-monoamide and derivatives thereof.
  • DOTA 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid
  • DTPA diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid
  • DTPA-bismethylamide DTPA-bismorpholineamide
  • chelating ligands encapsulate the radiometal by binding to it via multiple nitrogen and oxygen atoms, thus preventing the release of free (unbound) radiometal into the body. This is important, as in vivo dissociation of 3 + radiometals from their chelate can result in uptake of the radiometal in the liver, bone and spleen [Brechbiel M W, Gansow O A, “Backbone-substituted DTPA ligands for 90 Y radioimmunotherapy”, Bioconj. Chem.
  • Preferred radionuclides for scintigraphy or radiotherapy include 99m Tc, 67 Ga, 68 Ga, 47 SC, 51 Cr, 167 Tm, 141 Ce, 111 In, 123 I, 125 I, 131 I, 18 F, 11 C, 15 N, 168 Yb, 175 Yb, 140 La, 90 Y, 88 Y, 86 Y, 153 Sm, 166 Ho, 165 Dy, 166 Dy, 62 Cu, 64 Cu, 67 Cu, 97 Ru, 103 Ru, 186 Re, 188 Re, 203 Pb, 211 Bi, 212 Bi, 213 Bi, 214 Bi, 225 Ac, 211 At, 105 Rh, 109 Pd, 117m Sn, 149 Pm, 161 Tb, 177 Lu, 198 Au, 199 Au, and oxides or nitrides thereof.
  • the choice of isotope will be determined based on the desired therapeutic or diagnostic application.
  • the preferred radionuclides include 64 Cu, 67 Ga, 68 Ga, 99m Tc, and 111 In, with 99m Tc and 111 In being especially preferred.
  • the preferred radionuclides include 64 Cu, 90 Y, 105 Rh, 111 In, 117m Sn, 149 Pm, 153 Sm, 161 Tb, 166 Dy, 166 Ho, 175 Yb, 177 Lu, 186/188 Re, and 199 Au, with 177 Lu and 90 Y being particularly preferred.
  • 99m Tc is particularly useful and is a preferred diagnostic radionuclide because of its low cost, availability, imaging properties, and high specific activity. The nuclear and radioactive properties of 99m Tc make this isotope an ideal scintigraphic imaging agent.
  • This isotope has a single photon energy of 140 keV and a radioactive half-life of about 6 hours, and is readily available from a 99 Mo— 99m Tc generator.
  • 111 In is also particularly preferred diagnostic isotope, as this +3 metal ion has very similar chemistry to that of the radiotherapeutic +3 lanthanides, thus allowing the preparation of a diagnostic/therapeutic 111 In/ 177 Lu pair.
  • Peptides labeled with 177 Lu, 90 Y or other therapeutic radionuclides can be used to provide radiotherapy for primary tumors and metastasis related to cancers of the prostate, breast, lung, etc., and 111 In analogs can be used to detect the presence of such tumors.
  • the selection of a proper nuclide for use in a particular radiotherapeutic application depends on many factors, including:
  • Radionuclide should have a physical half-life between about 0.5 and 8 days.
  • Radionuclides that are particle emitters (such as alpha emitters and beta emitters) are particularly useful, as they emit highly energetic particles that deposit their energy over short distances, thereby producing highly localized damage.
  • Beta emitting radionuclides are particularly preferred, as the energy from beta particle emissions from these isotopes is deposited within 5 to about 150 cell diameters.
  • Radiotherapeutic agents prepared from these nuclides are capable of killing diseased cells that are relatively close to their site of localization, but cannot travel long distances to damage adjacent normal tissue such as bone marrow.
  • Radionuclides that have high specific activity (e.g. generator produced 90-Y, 111-In, 177-Lu) are particularly preferred.
  • the specific activity of a radionuclide is determined by its method of production, the particular target that is used to produce it, and the properties of the isotope in question.
  • linker and “linking group” are used synonymously herein to refer to any chemical group that serves to couple the targeting molecule to the metal chelator while not adversely affecting either the targeting function of the targeting molecule or the metal complexing function of the metal chelator.
  • Linking groups may optionally be present in the stabilized radiopharmaceutical formulations of the invention.
  • Suitable linking groups include peptides (i.e., amino acids linked together) alone, a non-peptide group (e.g., hydrocarbon chain) or a combination of an amino acid sequence and a non-peptide spacer.
  • the linking group includes L-glutamine and a hydrocarbon chain, or a combination thereof.
  • the linking group includes a pure peptide linking group consisting of a series of amino acids (e.g., diglycine, triglycine, gly-gly-glu, gly-ser-gly, etc.), in which the total number of atoms between the N-terminal residue of the targeting molecule and the metal chelator in the polymeric chain is ⁇ 12 atoms.
  • a pure peptide linking group consisting of a series of amino acids (e.g., diglycine, triglycine, gly-gly-glu, gly-ser-gly, etc.), in which the total number of atoms between the N-terminal residue of the targeting molecule and the metal chelator in the polymeric chain is ⁇ 12 atoms.
  • R 1 is a group (e.g., H 2 N—, HS—, —COOH) that can be used as a site for covalently linking the ligand backbone or the preformed metal chelator or metal complexing backbone
  • R 2 is a group that is used for covalent coupling to the targeting
  • the linking group is of the formula N—O—P and contains at least one non-alpha amino acid.
  • the linker N—O—P contains at least one non-alpha amino acid.
  • N Gly
  • O a non-alpha amino acid
  • P 0.
  • Alpha amino acids are well known in the art, and include naturally occurring and synthetic amino acids. Non-alpha amino acids also include those which are naturally occurring or synthetic. Preferred non-alpha amino acids include:
  • the linker is of the formula N—O—P and contains at least one substituted bile acid.
  • N—O—P the linker N—O—P
  • Bile acids are found in bile (a secretion of the liver) and are steroids having a hydroxyl group and a five carbon atom side chain terminating in a carboxyl group.
  • substituted bile acids at least one atom such as a hydrogen atom of the bile acid is substituted with another atom, molecule or chemical group.
  • substituted bile acids include those having a 3-amino, 24-carboxyl function optionally substituted at positions 7 and 12 with hydrogen, hydroxyl or keto functionality.
  • substituted bile acids in the present invention include substituted cholic acids and derivatives thereof.
  • Specific substituted cholic acid derivatives include:
  • the linker N—O—P contains at least one non-alpha amino acid with a cyclic group.
  • Non-alpha amino acids with a cyclic group include substituted phenyl, biphenyl, cyclohexyl or other amine and carboxyl containing cyclic aliphatic or heterocyclic moieties. Examples of such include:
  • Any molecule that specifically binds to or reactively associates or complexes with a receptor or other receptive moiety associated with a given target cell population may be used as a targeting molecule in radiopharmaceutical formulations of the invention.
  • This cell reactive molecule, to which the metal chelator is linked optionally via a linking group, may be any molecule that binds to, complexes with or reacts with the cell population sought to be bound or localized to.
  • the cell reactive molecule acts to deliver the radiopharmaceutical to the particular target cell population with which the molecule reacts.
  • the targeting molecule may be non-peptidic such as, for example, steroids, carbohydrates, or small non-peptidic molecules.
  • the targeting molecule may also be an antibody, such as, for example, a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody, a fragment thereof, or a protein, including, for example, derivatives of Annexin, anti-CEA, Tositumomab, HUA33, Epratuzumab, cG250, human serum albumin, lbritumomab Tiuxetan and the like.
  • the targeting molecule is a peptide, peptide mimetic or peptoid. Most preferably the targeting molecule is a peptide (a “targeting peptide”).
  • the targeting molecule used in a radiopharmaceutical formulation of the invention is a biologically active peptide.
  • the targeting molecule is a peptide that binds to a receptor or enzyme of interest.
  • the targeting molecule may be a peptide hormone such as, for example, luteinizing hormone releasing hormone (LHRH) such as that described in the literature (e.g., Radiometal-Binding Analogues of Luteinizing Hormone Releasing Hormone PCT/US96/08695; PCT/US97/12084 (WO 98/02192)); insulin; oxytocin; somatostatin; Neuro kinin-1 (NK-1); Vasoactive Intestinal Peptide (VIP) including both linear and cyclic versions as delineated in the literature, [e.g., Comparison of Cyclic and Linear Analogs of Vasoactive Intestinal Peptide.
  • LHRH luteinizing hormone releasing hormone
  • VIP Vasoactive Intestinal Peptide
  • somatostatin analogues of somatostatin which, for example, are Lanreotide (Nal-Cys-Thr-DTrp-Lys-Val-Cys-Thr-NH 2 ), Octreotide (Nal-Cys-Thr-DTrp-Lys-Val-Cys-Thr-ol), and Maltose-(Phe-Cys-Thr-DTrp-Lys-Val-Cys-Thr-ol).
  • Lanreotide Nal-Cys-Thr-DTrp-Lys-Val-Cys-Thr-NH 2
  • Octreotide Nal-Cys-Thr-DTrp-Lys-Val-Cys-Thr-ol
  • Still other useful targeting molecules include Substance P agonists [e.g., G. Bitan, G. Byk, Y. Mahriki, M. Hanani, D. Halle, Z. Selinger, C. Gilon, Peptides: Chemistry, Structure and Biology, Pravin T. P. Kaumaya, and Roberts S. Hodges (Eds), Mayflower Scientific LTD., 1996, pgs 697-698; G Protein Antagonists A novel hydrophobic peptide competes with receptor for G protein binding, Hidehito Mukai, Eisuke Munekata, Tsutomu Higashijima, J. Biol. Chem.
  • NPY(Y1) e.g., Novel Analogues of Neuropeptide Y with a Preference for the yl-receptor, Richard M. Soll, Michaela, C. Dinger, Ingrid Lundell, Dan Larhammer, Annette G. Beck-Sickinger, Eur. J. Biochem. 2001, 268, 2828-2837; 99m Tc-Labeled Neuropeptide Y Analogues as Potential Tumor Imaging Agents, Michael Langer, Roberto La Bella, Elisa Garcia-Garayoa, Annette G. Beck-Sickinger, Bioconjugate Chem.
  • TGF tumor growth factors
  • VGF tumor growth factors
  • IGF insulin-like growth factors
  • IGF insulinlike growth factor
  • peptides targeting receptors which are upregulated in angiogenesis such as VEGF receptors (e.g., KDR, NP-1, etc.), RGD-containing peptides, melanocyte-stimulating hormone (MSH) peptide, neurotensin, calcitonin, peptides from complementarity determining regions of an antitumor antibody, glutathione, YIGSR (leukocyte-avid peptides, e.g., P483H, which contains the heparin-binding region of platelet factor-4 (PF-4) and a lysine-rich sequence), atrial natri
  • analogues of a targeting molecule can be used. These analogues include molecules that target a desired site receptor with avidity that is greater than or equal to the targeting molecule itself.
  • analogues include muteins, retropeptides and retro-inverso-peptides of the targeting peptide.
  • modifications which include substitutions, and/or deletions and/or additions of one or several amino acids, insofar that these modifications do not negatively alter the biological activity of the targeting molecules. Substitutions in targeting peptides may be carried out by replacing one or more amino acids by their synonymous amino acids.
  • Synonymous amino acids within a group are defined as amino acids that have sufficient physicochemical properties to allow substitution between members of a group in order to preserve the biological function of the molecule.
  • Synonymous amino acids as used herein include synthetic derivatives of these amino acids (such as for example the D-forms of amino acids and other synthetic derivatives), and, the D-forms of amino acids and other synthetic derivatives).
  • amino acids are abbreviated interchangeably either by their three letter or single letter abbreviations, which are well known to the skilled artisan.
  • T or Thr stands for threonine
  • K or Lys stands for lysine
  • P or Pro stands for proline
  • R or Arg stands for arginine.
  • Deletions or insertions of amino acids may also be introduced into the defined sequences of targeting peptides provided they do not alter the biological functions of said sequences. Preferentially such insertions or deletions should be limited to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 amino acids and should not remove or physically disturb or displace amino acids which are critical to the functional conformation.
  • Muteins of targeting peptides or polypeptides may have a sequence homologous to the original targeting peptide sequence in which amino acid substitutions, deletions, or insertions are present at one or more amino acid positions.
  • Muteins may have a biological activity that is at least 40%, preferably at least 50%, more preferably 60-70%, most preferably 80-90% of the original targeting peptide.
  • Analogues of targeting peptides also include peptidomimetics or pseudopeptides incorporating changes to the amide bonds of the peptide backbone, including thioamides, methylene amines, and E-olefins. Also molecules based on the structure of a targeting peptide or its analogues with amino acids replaced by N-substituted hydrazine carbonyl compounds (also known as aza amino acids) are included in the term analogues as used herein.
  • a targeting peptide may be attached to a linker via the N or C terminus or via attachment to the epsilon nitrogen of lysine, the gamma nitrogen or ornithine or the second carboxyl group of aspartic or glutamic acid.
  • the targeting molecule is a gastrin releasing peptide (GRP) receptor targeting molecule.
  • GRP receptor-targeting molecule is a molecule that specifically binds to or reactively associates or complexes with one or more members of the GRP receptor family. In other words, it is a molecule which has a binding affinity for the GRP receptor family.
  • the targeting molecule is a GRP receptor targeting peptide (e.g., a peptide, equivalent, analogue or derivative thereof with a binding affinity for one or more members of the GRP receptor family).
  • the GRP receptor targeting molecule may take the form of an agonist or an antagonist.
  • a GRP receptor targeting molecule agonist is known to “activate” the cell following binding with high affinity and may be internalized by the cell.
  • GRP receptor targeting molecule antagonists are known to bind only to the GRP receptor on the cell without stimulating internalization by the cell and without “activating” the cell.
  • the GRP receptor targeting molecule is an agonist and more preferably it is a peptide agonist.
  • the GRP agonist is a bombesin (BBN) analogue and/or a derivative thereof.
  • BBN derivative or analog thereof preferably contains either the same primary structure of the BBN binding region (i.e., BBN(7-14) [SEQ ID NO:1]) or similar primary structures, with specific amino acid substitutions that will specifically bind to GRP receptors with better or similar binding affinities as BBN alone (i.e., Kd ⁇ 25 nM).
  • Suitable compounds include peptides, peptidomimetics and analogues and derivatives thereof.
  • the presence of L-methionine (Met) at position BBN-14 will generally confer agonistic properties while the absence of this residue at BBN-14 generally confers antagonistic properties [Hoffken, 1994].
  • Analogues of BBN receptor targeting molecules include molecules that target the GRP receptors with avidity that is greater than or equal to BBN, as well as muteins, retropeptides and retro-inverso-peptides of GRP or BBN.
  • these analogues may also contain modifications which include substitutions, and/or deletions and/or additions of one or several amino acids, insofar that these modifications do not negatively alter the biological activity of the peptides described therein. These substitutions may be carried out by replacing one or more amino acids by their synonymous amino acids.
  • the stabilizers of the present invention may also be used for compounds that do not have a distinct targeting or linking group, and wherein the metal/chelator combination alone provides targeting to the desired organ or organ system.
  • the stabilizers described here have potential utility in the stabilization of compounds such as 166 Ho-DOTMP, 188 Re-HEDTMP, 153 Sm-EDTMP, 99m Tc-MDP and the like, all of which target bone.
  • incorporation of the radioisotope within the stabilized conjugates of this invention can be achieved by various methods commonly known in the art of coordination chemistry. Where incorporation of, for example, 111 In or 177 Lu is desired, the methods set forth in the Examples may be used.
  • the metal is 99m Tc, a preferred radionuclide for diagnostic imaging, the following general procedure can be used to form a technetium complex.
  • a peptide-chelator conjugate solution is formed by initially dissolving the conjugate in an aqueous solution of dilute acid, base, salt or buffer, or in an aqueous solution of an alcohol such as ethanol. The solution is then optionally degassed to remove dissolved oxygen.
  • a thiol protecting group such as Acm (acetamidomethyl), trityl or other thiol protecting group may optionally be used to protect the thiol from oxidation.
  • the thiol protecting group(s) are removed with a suitable reagent, for example with sodium hydroxide, and are then neutralized with an organic acid such as acetic acid.
  • the thiol protecting group can be removed in situ during technetium chelation.
  • sodium pertechnetate obtained from a molybdenum generator is added to a solution of the conjugate with a sufficient amount of a reducing agent, such as stannous chloride, to reduce technetium and is either allowed to stand at room temperature or is heated.
  • a reducing agent such as stannous chloride
  • the labeled conjugate can be separated from the contaminants 99m TcO 4 ⁇ and colloidal 99m TcO 2 chromatographically, for example with a C-18 Sep Pak cartridge [Millipore Corporation] or by HPLC using methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • the labeling can be accomplished by a transchelation reaction.
  • the technetium source is a solution of technetium that is reduced and complexed with labile ligands prior to reaction with the selected chelator, thus facilitating ligand exchange with the selected chelator.
  • suitable ligands for transchelation includes tartrate, citrate, gluconate, and heptagluconate.
  • the conjugate can be labeled using the techniques described above, or alternatively, the chelator itself may be labeled and subsequently coupled to the peptide to form the conjugate; a process referred to as the “prelabeled chelate” method.
  • Re and Tc are both in row VIIB of the Periodic Table and they are chemical congeners.
  • the complexation chemistry of these two metals with ligand frameworks that exhibit high in vitro and in vivo stabilities are the same [Eckelman, 1995] and similar chelators and procedures can be used to label with Re.
  • This oxidation state makes it possible to selectively place 99m Tc- or 186/188 Re into ligand frameworks already conjugated to the biomolecule, constructed from a variety of 99m Tc(V) and/or 186/188 Re(V) weak chelates (e.g., 99m Tc-glucoheptonate, citrate, gluconate, etc.) [Eckelman, 1995; Lister-James et al., 1997; Pollak et al., 1996].
  • 99m Tc-glucoheptonate citrate, gluconate, etc.
  • the stabilized radiopharmaceuticals and radiopharmaceutical formulations of the present invention can be used to image or deliver radiotherapy to selected tissues. In a preferred embodiment, they may be used to treat and/or detect cancers, including tumors, by procedures established in the art of radiodiagnostics and radiotherapeutics. [Bushbaum, 1995; Fischman et al., 1993; Schubiger et al., 1996; Lowbertz et al., 1994; Krenning et al., 1994].
  • the stabilized radiopharmaceutical formulations of the examples are able to target GRP receptor expressing tissues, including tumors and thus to image or deliver radiotherapy to these tissues.
  • GRP receptors are well documented to be over-expressed in a number of cancer types such as prostate, breast and small cell lung cancer, a radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic agent that targets such receptors has the potential to be widely useful for the diagnosis or treatment of such cancers.
  • the diagnostic application of the stabilized radiopharmaceuticals of the invention can be as a first line diagnostic screen for the presence of a disease state such as, for example, neoplastic cells using scintigraphic imaging, as an agent for targeting particular tissues (e.g., neoplastic tissue) using hand-held radiation detection instrumentation in the field of radio guided surgery (RIGS), as a means to obtain dosimetry data prior to administration of the matched pair radiotherapeutic compound, and as a means to assess, for example, receptor population as a function of treatment over time.
  • a disease state such as, for example, neoplastic cells using scintigraphic imaging, as an agent for targeting particular tissues (e.g., neoplastic tissue) using hand-held radiation detection instrumentation in the field of radio guided surgery (RIGS), as a means to obtain dosimetry data prior to administration of the matched pair radiotherapeutic compound, and as a means to assess, for example, receptor population as a function of treatment over time.
  • the therapeutic application of the stabilized radiopharmaceuticals of the invention can be as an agent that will be used as a monotherapy in the treatment of a disease, such as cancer, as combination therapy where these radiolabeled agents could be utilized in conjunction with adjuvant chemotherapy, and as the matched pair therapeutic agent.
  • the matched pair concept refers to a single unlabeled compound which can serve as both a diagnostic and a therapeutic agent depending on the radioisotope that has been selected for binding to the appropriate chelate. If the chelator cannot accommodate the desired metals appropriate substitutions can be made to accommodate the different metal whilst maintaining the pharmacology such that the behaviour of the diagnostic compound in vivo can be used to predict the behaviour of the radiotherapeutic compound.
  • the stabilized compounds and formulations of the present invention can be administered to a patient alone or as part of a composition that contains other components such as excipients, diluents, and carriers, all of which are well-known in the art.
  • the compounds can be administered to patients intravenously, subcutaneously, intra-arterially, intraperitoneally, intratumorally or by installation into resection cavities in, e.g., the brain.
  • Stabilized radiolabeled scintigraphic imaging agents provided by the present invention are provided having a suitable amount of radioactivity.
  • radioactive complexes In forming 99m Tc radioactive complexes, it is generally preferred to form radioactive complexes in solutions containing radioactivity at concentrations of from about 0.01 millicurie (mCi) to 100 mCi per mL.
  • the unit dose to be administered has a radioactivity of about 0.01 mCi to about 100 mCi, preferably 1 mCi to 30 mCi.
  • the solution to be injected at unit dosage is from about 0.01 mL to about 10 mL.
  • the unit dose to be administered typically ranges from about 0.01 mCi to about 10 mCi, preferably 3 to 6 mCi for diagnostic applications, and from 10 mCi to about 2 Curies for radiotherapeutic applications, preferably 30 mCi to 800 mCi.
  • the unit dose to be administered typically ranges from about 10 mCi to about 200 mCi, preferably from about 100 to about 200 mCi.
  • the amount of labeled conjugate appropriate for administration is dependent upon the distribution profile of the chosen conjugate in the sense that a rapidly cleared conjugate may need to be administered in higher doses than one that clears less rapidly.
  • In vivo distribution and localization can be tracked by standard scintigraphic techniques at an appropriate time subsequent to administration; typically between thirty minutes and 180 minutes depending upon the rate of accumulation at the target site with respect to the rate of clearance at non-target tissue.
  • a gamma camera calibrated for the gamma ray energy of the nuclide incorporated in the imaging agent can be used to image areas of uptake of the agent and quantify the amount of radioactivity present in the site. Imaging of the site in vivo can take place in a few minutes. However, imaging can take place, if desired, hours or days after the radiolabeled compound is injected into a patient. In most instances, a sufficient amount of the administered dose will accumulate in the area to be imaged within about 0.1 hour to permit the taking of scintiphotos. With radiolabeled antibodies and antibody fragments, appropriate imaging times may be up to about one week following administration.
  • the compounds made in accordance with the present invention form stable, well-defined 111 In or 177 Lu labeled compounds.
  • Similar stabilized compounds and formulations of the invention can also be made by using appropriate chelator frameworks for the respective radiometals, to form stable, well-defined products labeled with 153 Sm, 90 Y, 166 Ho, 105 Rh, 199 Au, 149 Pm, 99m Tc, 186/188 Re or other radiometal.
  • the stabilized radiolabeled GRP receptor targeting peptides selectively bind to neoplastic cells expressing GRP receptors, and if an agonist is used, become internalized, and are retained in the tumor cells for extended time periods. Because of the high radiostability obtained, the radioactive formulations do not undergo significant decompositon, and thus can be prepared at, for example, a central radiolabeling facility and then shipped to distant sites without significant decomposition and loss of targeting ability.
  • Radioisotope therapy involves the administration of a radiolabeled compound in sufficient quantity to damage or destroy the targeted tissue.
  • the stabilized radiolabeled pharmaceutical localizes preferentially at the disease site (e.g., tumor tissue that expresses a member of the GRP receptor family). Once localized, the radiolabeled compound then damages or destroys the diseased tissue with the energy that is released during the radioactive decay of the isotope that is administered.
  • the present invention provides stabilized radiotherapeutic agents that satisfy all of the above criteria, through proper selection of stabilizer or stabilizers, targeting group, radionuclide, metal chelate [if present] and optional linker.
  • any of the chelators for therapeutic radionuclides disclosed herein may be used.
  • forms of the DOTA chelate [Tweedle M F, Gaughan G T, Hagan J T, “1-Substituted-1,4,7-triscarboxymethyl-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane and analogs.” U.S. Pat. No. 4,885,363, Dec. 5, 1989] are particularly preferred, as the DOTA chelate is expected to lose the bound radionuclide less in the body than DTPA or other linear chelates.
  • the selection and amount of the proper stabilizer or stabilizer combination used to stabilize the radionuclide selected will also depend on the properties of the isotope selected, as, in general, nuclides that emit high energy alpha or beta radiation will have a requirement for more radiostabilizer than those that emit low energy radiation.
  • lanthanides and lanthanoids include radioisotopes that have nuclear properties that make them suitable for use as radiotherapeutic agents, as they emit beta particles. Some of these are listed in the table below.
  • isotopes that are essentially isotopically pure (i.e., free of their nonradioactive congeners) be used, to allow delivery of as high a dose of radioactivity to the target tissue as possible.
  • Stabilized radiotherapeutic derivatives of the invention containing beta-emitting isotopes of lutetium and yttrium are particularly preferred.
  • the stabilized compounds of the present invention can be administered using many methods which include, but are not limited to, a single or multiple IV or IP injections, using a quantity of radioactivity that is sufficient to permit imaging or, in the case of radiotherapy, to cause damage or ablation of the targeted tissue, but not so much that substantive damage is caused to non-target (normal tissue).
  • the quantity and dose required for scintigraphic imaging is discussed supra.
  • the quantity and dose required for radiotherapy is also different for different constructs, depending on the energy and half-life of the isotope used, the degree of uptake and clearance of the agent from the body and the mass of the tumor. In general, doses can range from a single dose of about 30-200 mCi to a cumulative dose of up to about 3 Curies.
  • the radiopharmaceutical compositions of the invention can include physiologically acceptable buffers, non-aqueous solvents, bulking agents and other lyophilization aids or solubilizing agents. They can be either in a liquid formulation [either frozen or at room temperature, or can be lyophilized (freeze dried).
  • a single, or multi-vial kit that contains all of the components needed to prepare the stabilized radiopharmaceuticals of this invention, other than the radionuclide, is an integral part of this invention.
  • a single-vial kit for the preparation of stabilized compounds preferably contains a chelator/optional linker/targeting peptide molecule, an optional source of stannous salt or other pharmaceutically acceptable reducing agent (if reduction is required, e.g., when using technetium or rhenium), and is appropriately buffered with pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base to adjust the pH to a value of about 3 to about 9.
  • reducing agent if reduction is required, e.g., when using technetium or rhenium
  • the quantity and type of reducing agent used will depend highly on the nature of the exchange complex to be formed. The proper conditions are well known to those that are skilled in the art.
  • the kit contents are in lyophilized form.
  • such a single vial kit may optionally contain labile or exchange ligands such as acetate, glucoheptonate, gluconate, mannitol, malate, citric or tartaric acid and can also contain reaction modifiers such as diethylenetriamine-pentaacetic acid (DPTA), ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), or ⁇ , ⁇ , or ⁇ -cyclodextrins and derivatives that serve to improve the radiochemical purity and stability of the final product.
  • the kit may also contain bulking agents such as mannitol that are designed to aid in the freeze-drying process, and other additives known to those skilled in the art.
  • the stabilizer or stabilizer combination selected should contain sufficient stabilizer to prevent significant decomposition of the product over the useful shelf-life of the reconstituted product.
  • a multi-vial kit preferably contains the same general components but employs more than one vial in reconstituting the radiopharmaceutical.
  • one vial may contain all of the ingredients that are required to form a labile Tc(V) or Re(V) complex on addition of pertechnetate (e.g., the stannous source or other reducing agent).
  • pertechnetate e.g., the stannous source or other reducing agent
  • Pertechnetate is added to this vial, and after waiting an appropriate period of time, the contents of this vial are added to a second vial that contains the chelator and targeting peptide, as well as buffers appropriate to adjust the pH to its optimal value and stabilizers sufficient to prevent radiolytic damage. After a reaction time of about 5 to 60 minutes, the complexes of the present invention are formed. It is advantageous that the contents of both vials of this multi-vial kit be lyophilized. As above, reaction modifiers, exchange ligands, stabilizers, bulking agents, etc
  • radiostabilizers described herein are a requirement in stabilized formulations of the invention.
  • the purpose of these stabilizers is to slow or prevent radiolytic damage to both the unlabeled and radiolabeled radiopharmaceuticals.
  • some radiostabilizers are known, none of the literature has revealed the need for radiostabilizers for radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic GRP-receptor binding compounds.
  • stabilizers are required, especially as the amount of radioactivity in the formulation is increased, and when beta-emitting radiotherapeutic isotopes are used.
  • many stabilizers have been identified that, alone or in combination, inhibit radiolytic damage to radiolabeled compounds. At this time, four approaches are the most preferred solutions to the problem.
  • a radiolysis stabilizing solution containing a mixture of the following ingredients is added to the radiolabeled compound immediately following the radiolabeling reaction: gentisic acid, ascorbic acid, human serum albumin, benzyl alcohol, a physiologically acceptable buffer or salt solution at a pH of about 4.5 to about 8.5, and in a preferred embodiment, one or more amino acids selected from methionine, selenomethionine, selenocysteine, or cysteine.
  • the physiologically acceptable buffer or salt solution is preferably selected from phosphate, citrate, or acetate buffers or physiologically acceptable sodium chloride solutions or a mixture thereof, at a molarity of from about 0.02M to about 0.2M.
  • the following concentrations are used: gentisic acid (2-20 mg/mL, most preferably about 10 mg/mL), ascorbic acid (10 to 100 mg/mL, most preferably about 50 mg/mL), human serum albumin (0.1 to 0.5%, most preferably about 0.2% (w/v)), benzyl alcohol (20 to 100 ⁇ L/mL, most preferably about 90 ⁇ L/mL), pH 4.5 to 8.0, most preferably about pH 5.0 citrate buffer (0.05 molar), and D- or L-methionine, L-selenomethionine, or L-cysteine (2 mg/mL).
  • Physiologically acceptable salts of the reagents may also be used (e.g. sodium ascorbate or sodium gentistate).
  • D-, L-, and DL-forms of the amino acids may be used. Indeed, reference to a particular amino acid herein is intended to encompass use of the D-, L- and DL-forms of that amino acid.
  • the reagent benzyl alcohol is a key component in this formulation and serves two purposes. For compounds that have limited solubility, one of its purposes is to solubilize the radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic targeted compound in the reaction solution, without the need for added organic solvents. Its second purpose is to provide a bacteriostatic effect. This is important, as solutions that contain the radiostabilizers of the invention are expected to have long post-reconstitution stability, so the presence of a bacteriostat is desirable in order to maintain sterility.
  • the amino acids methionine, selenomethionine, cysteine, and selenocysteine are also key components in this formulation and play a special role in preventing radiolytic damage to methionyl residues in targeted molecules that are stabilized with this radiostabilizing combination.
  • R1 and R2 are each independently H; C1-C8 alkyl; —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl; or benzyl (Bn) (either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups), or wherein R1R2N combined are 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl- and M may be H + , Na + , K + , NH 4 + , N-methylglucamine or other pharmaceutically acceptable +1 ion.
  • compounds of the form shown below may be used, wherein M is a physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state, such as Mg 2+ or Ca 2+ , and R1 and R2 have the same definition as described above.
  • reagents can either be added directly into reaction mixtures during radiolabeled complex preparation, or added after complexation is complete, or both.
  • the compound 1-Pyrrolidine Dithiocarbamic Acid Ammonium salt (PDTC) proved most efficacious as a stabilizer, when either added directly to the reaction mixture or added after complex formation.
  • Use of this compound as a single reagent was effective at radioprotection of 177 Lu-A and 177 Lu-B (unlike in many of the studies above, where a combination of reagents had to be used). These results were unexpected, as the compound has not been reported for use as a stabilizer for radiopharmaceuticals prior to these studies.
  • dithiocarbamates such as PDTC provide the additional benefit of preventing contaminating metals from interfering with the labeling reaction.
  • formulations contain stabilizers that are water soluble organic selenium compounds wherein the selenium is in the oxidation state +2.
  • stabilizers that are water soluble organic selenium compounds wherein the selenium is in the oxidation state +2.
  • amino acid compounds selenomethionine, and selenocysteine and their esters and amide derivatives and dipeptides and tri peptides thereof which can either be added directly to the reaction mixture prior to or during radiolabeled complex preparation, or following complex preparation.
  • the flexibility of having these stabilizers in the vial at the time of labeling or in a separate vial extends the utility of this invention for manufacturing radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic kits.
  • selenium compounds With these selenium compounds, it is highly efficacious to use these reagents in combination with sodium ascorbate or other pharmaceutically acceptable forms of ascorbic acid and its derivatives.
  • the ascorbate is most preferably added after complexation is complete.
  • Example 22 describes radiostabilization with this combination of reagents. Alternatively, it can be used as a component of the stabilizing formulation described above. If the selenium compound is an amino acid derivative such as selenomethionine or selenocysteine, then D-, L- and DL isomers of this amino acid derivative may be used.
  • a fourth approach involves the use of water soluble sulfur-containing compounds wherein the sulfur is in the +2 oxidation state.
  • Preferred thiol compounds include derivatives of cysteine, mercaptothanol, and dithiolthreitol. These reagents are particularly preferred due to their ability to reduce oxidized forms of methionine residues (e.g., methionine oxide residues) back to methionyl residues, thus restoring oxidative damage that has occurred as a result of radiolysis.
  • methionine residues e.g., methionine oxide residues
  • the ascorbate is most preferably added after complexation is complete. If the thiol compound is an amino acid derivative such as cysteine or cysteine ethyl ester, then D-, L- and DL isomers of this amino
  • oxidative stabilization may be used to protect other radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutics derived from, e.g., peptides, monoclonal antibodies, monoclonal antibody fragments, aptamers, oligonucleotides and small molecules, from oxidative degradation (not necessarily just methionine oxidation).
  • Potential stabilizers were evaluated for their ability to prevent or slow the decomposition of 177 Lu complexes of Compound A, referred to as 177 Lu-A, and 177 Lu complexes of Compound B, referred to as 177 Lu-B, their Indium-labeled analogs 111 In-A and 111 In-B, and other compounds in this class.
  • Potential scavengers were evaluated in different ways: by either adding them directly to the reaction mixture used to form the 177 Lu or 111 In complexes, or by adding the stabilizer(s) after the radiometal complex was formed (or both). Several efficacious stabilizers and stabilizer combinations have been identified.
  • L-cysteine and the cysteine derivatives L-cysteine ethyl ester or L-cysteine methyl ester, D-, L-, and DL-methionine, L-selenomethionine, gentisic acid (Sodium salt), ascorbic acid (Sodium Salt) and 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt (PDTC) were shown to be most efficacious in this respect when used as individual stabilizers.
  • radiolysis protecting solution that contained a mixture of stabilizers proved especially useful.
  • Formulations stabilized by such cocktails maintained excellent radiochemical purity (RCP) values (>95% RCP) for as long as 5 days at room temperature.
  • RCP radiochemical purity
  • This stabilizing cocktail is added immediately after formation of the radioactive complex, so would be the second vial of a two-vial kit.
  • the reagents in this radiolysis protecting solution are shown in Table 2:
  • Radiolysis Protecting Solution Concentration in Radiolysis Protecting Reagent Solution Gentisic acid 10 mg/mL Ascorbic acid 50 mg/mL Human serum albumin 0.2% (w/v) Benzyl alcohol 90 ⁇ L/mL pH 5.0 citrate buffer 0.05 molar D-DL- or L-Methionine, L- 2 mg/mL Selenomethionine, or L-cysteine
  • FIG. 4 shows the results obtained when 1 mL of a reaction mixture containing 104 mCi of 177 Lu-B was incubated at room temperature with 1 mL of the above radiolysis protecting solution that contained 2 mg/mL DL-methionine, 10 mg/mL gentisic acid, 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid, 0.2% HSA and 90 benzyl alcohol in 0.05 M citrate buffer, pH 5.3.
  • radiostabilization (RCP>95%) was achieved for 177 Lu-A if the concentration of methionine in the radiolysis protecting solution was increased to 3 mg/mL and all other reagents were held at their previous levels. 177 Lu-A was also stable for 5 days when methionine in the stabilizing cocktail is replaced by methionine, L-cysteine or L-selenomethionine.
  • the data in FIG. 5 show the results obtained when 55 mCi of 177 Lu-A was incubated for 5 days at room temperature with the following mixture: 1.5 mg/mL L-cysteine; 5 mg/mL gentisic acid; 25 mg/mL ascorbic acid; 1 mg/mL HSA, 45 ⁇ L benzyl alcohol in 0.05M citrate buffer, pH 5.3.
  • Methionine has been reported recently to be a stabilizer for radiodiagnostic compounds. However, in the present application (vide infra), it was determined that that methionine alone was insufficient to protect the compounds from radiolytic damage when high radioactivity levels are used, although some radiostabilization was observed (see, e.g., FIG. 3 ). However, the addition of the methionine-containing radiolysis protecting solution described above gives a strong protective effect that is not present when only methionine is used.
  • Organic compounds containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state Organic compounds containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state, including selenomethionine and selenocysteine have not been reported as a radioprotectant for radiopharmaceuticals, nor has cysteine or other organic compounds containing thiols in the +2 oxidation state. Both of these compounds were found to be radioprotectants in their own right, and to have valuable properties if added to a radiolysis stabilizing solution as described in this disclosure.
  • Cysteine derivatives L-cysteine, when added into a radiolysis stabilizing solution, appears to help prevent the oxidation of the methionine residue present in the GRP receptor-binding peptides.
  • the ability of L-cysteine and of several cysteine derivatives (by themselves, rather than as part of a stabilizing cocktail) to effect such stabilization has been evaluated.
  • cystamine dihydrochloride, L-cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, L-cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, L-cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, L-cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate are expected to have utility both as individual stabilizers and as components in stabilizing mixtures such as those described herein.
  • Dithiocarbamates The examples provide evidence that dithiocarbamates, in particular the ammonium salt of 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid, provide excellent stability as a single reagent without any additional stabilizers, when added to a radiolabeled peptide after complex formation (2-vial kit).
  • 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid (PDTC) and other dithiocarbamates have not been reported as radioprotectants for either radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic applications.
  • the structure of PDTC is shown below.
  • This compound is also extremely effective if added directly to the formulation during complex formation. At concentrations where it is an effective radiostabilizer, it does not interfere with complex formation. This is a clear advantage, as this allows a single-vial formulation, with all components in one vial.
  • Dithiocarbamates such as PDTC also have the added advantage of serving to scavenge adventitious trace metals in the reaction mixture.
  • radioisotopes e.g., 90 Y, 111 In
  • contaminating non-radioactive metals such as Fe, Zn, or Cu
  • the concentration of ligand used for radiotherapy is often very low, even a small amount of contaminating metal can be highly detrimental to a labeling reaction. This is especially true in formulations where the concentration of ligand has to be kept to a minimum in order to obtain as high a specific activity [i.e., mCi of radioactivity/mmole of ligand] as possible.
  • R1, R2 combinations are:
  • meglumine and glutamine compounds are also envisioned. They have the advantage of being water soluble.
  • M is a physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state, such as Mg 2+ or Ca 2+
  • R1 and R2 have the same definition as described above.
  • reagents can either be added directly into reaction mixtures during radiolabeled complex preparation, or added after complexation is complete, or both.
  • the compound PDTC, and pharmacologically acceptable salts thereof, is particularly preferred.
  • Formulations with stabilizers added directly to reaction mixture In most of the work described above, the stabilizer was added after formation of the radioactive complex. A series of studies were performed wherein different potential stabilizers were added directly to the reaction mixture during chelation. Such an approach is highly preferable, if a suitable compound can be found.
  • the best stabilizers for direct addition to the formulation are the following: 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt, D-, L-, or D,L-methionine, Trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt, L-cysteine, or L-Selenomethionine.
  • 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt D-, L-, or D,L-methionine
  • Trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt L-cysteine, or L-Selenomethionine.
  • L-Selenomethionine and 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid (ammonium salt) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof are most preferred.
  • the stereochemistry of the amino acid is not critical to the stabilization the D-, L-, and D,L-mixtures of all amino acids previously cited are useful, as are pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
  • Simple derivatives of these amino acids including, but not limited to, N-alkylation, N-acetylation, C-terminus amidation or esterification are useful as well. It is anticipated that simple dipeptides, tripeptides, tetrapeptides and pentapeptides containing one or more of these amino acids could also be used to stabilize radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic formulations.
  • Trifluoroacetic acid TAA
  • 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt PDTC
  • 2-hydroxybenzothiazole 2,1,3-benzothiadiazole, 5-thio-D-glucose
  • cystamine dihydrochloride L-cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, L-cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, L-cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, L-cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate, sodium L-ascorbate (ascorbic acid), 2,5-dihydroxybenzoic acid sodium salt hydrate (gentisic acid), thiamine hydrochloride, L-glutathione reduced, 2-ethyl-4-pyridinecarbothioamide (ethionamide), trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt nonahydrate, sodium dimethyldi
  • Acetic acid, glacial (ultra-pure) were purchased from J. T. Baker.
  • Acetonitrile and sodium acetate, anhydrous (ultra-pure) was purchased from EM Science.
  • D-methionine was purchased from Avocado Research Chemicals Ltd.
  • L-selenomethionine was purchased from Calbiochem.
  • Methanol, citric acid, anhydrous and sodium citrate were purchased from Fisher Scientific Company.
  • Human serum albumin (HSA) was purchased from Sigma. All reagents were used as received.
  • High-specific activity 177 LuCl 3 (in 0.05 N HCl) was obtained from the University of Missouri Research Reactor, Columbia, Mo.
  • 111 InCl 3 in 0.05N HCl was obtained from either PerkinElmer or Mallinckrodt.
  • the radiolabeled complexes prepared from these compounds are designated herein by the isotope-compound letter, i.e., 177 Lu-A is the 177 Lu complex of DOTA-Gly-ACA-Gln-Trp-Ala-Val-Gly-His-Leu-Met-NH 2 ) and 177 Lu-B is the 177 Lu complex of DOTA-Gly-Abz-4-Gln-Trp-Ala-Val-Gly-His-Leu-Met-NH 2 .
  • the synthesis of Compounds A and B is described in applicants' copending patent application Ser. No. 10/341,577, filed Jan. 13, 2003, which is hereby entirely incorporated by reference.
  • the mobile phase flow rate was 1 mL/min. with a gradient starting at 32% B to 34% B over 30 minutes, 34% to 40% B in 5 minutes, back to 32% B in 5 minutes, then a 5-minute hold for re-equilibration.
  • the injection volume was 20 ⁇ L.
  • the mobile phase flow rate was 1 mL/min with a gradient starting at 29% B to 32% B over 20 minutes, back to 29% B in 2 minutes, then a 5-minute hold for re-equilibration.
  • the injection volume was 20 ⁇ L.
  • the mobile phase flow rate was 1 mL/min with a gradient starting at 29% B to 32% B over 20 minutes, back to 29% B in 3 minutes, then an 8-minute hold for re-equilibration.
  • the injection volume was 20 ⁇ L.
  • the mobile phase flow rate was 1 mL/min. with a gradient starting at 21% B to 24% B over 20 minutes, back to 21% B in 3 minutes, then an 8 minute hold for re-equilibration.
  • the injection volume was 20 ⁇ L.
  • the mobile phase flow rate was 1 mL/min. with a gradient starting at 20% B, ramping to 24% B over 20 minutes, back to 20% B in 2 minutes, then a 3 minute hold for re-equilibration.
  • the injection volume was 10 ⁇ L.
  • EXAMPLE 1 shows the results obtained for a series of amino acids that were added individually to a solution of 177 Lu-A or 177 Lu-B and then incubated at room temperature over 48 hours, as well as results for an unstabilized control.
  • the amino acid concentration was 6.6 mg/mL
  • 177 Lu-A and 177 Lu-B had a concentration of ⁇ 20 mCi/mL
  • 3.5 mCi of 177 Lu was used in each reaction.
  • 177 Lu-A and 177 Lu-B were prepared by adding 300 ⁇ L of 0.2 M NaOAc (pH 5.0), 40 ⁇ g Compound A or B and 20 mCi of 177 LuCl 3 into a reaction vial. The mixture was incubated at 100° C. for five minutes, then cooled to room temperature. Free (uncomplexed) 177 Lu in the reaction solution was then scavenged (chelated) by adding 10 ⁇ L of a 10% Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O solution in water. A 50 ⁇ L aliquot of the reaction solution ( ⁇ 3.5 mCi) was mixed with 100 ⁇ L of one of the amino acid solutions above or a PBS control in a 2-mL autosampler vial.
  • the final radioactive concentration of each sample was ⁇ 20 mCi/mL.
  • the samples were stored in the autosampler chamber, and their stability over 48 hours was analyzed using HPLC Method 3 ( 177 Lu-A) or HPLC Method 4 ( 177 Lu-B). Chromatograms from this study at the 48-hour time point are shown in FIG. 7 .
  • radiochemical purity dropped from >95% to 1.3% within 24 hrs at room temperature.
  • RCP radiochemical purity
  • tryptophan a compound previously reported to be an effective stabilizer surprisingly did not protect against oxidation of the methionine residue present in the targeting peptides, although cysteine, methionine and selenomethionine were effective.
  • 177 Lu-A was formed by adding ⁇ 70 ⁇ g of Compound A and 50 mCi of 177 LuCl 3 (molar ratio of peptide to Lutetium of 3:1) to 1 mL of 0.2M NaOAc, pH 5.0. The mixture was heated at 100° C. for 5 min, cooled to room temperature in a water bath, and 1 mL of a 5 mg/mL L-methionine solution in water and 1 mg Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O was added into the reaction vial.
  • the chromatograms in FIG. 8 and the data in Table 4 below demonstrate the changes in radiochemical purity observed over 5 days at room temperature, when analyzed by reversed phase HPLC using HPLC Method 3. Table 4 summarizes the results shown in FIG. 8 .
  • EXAMPLE 1 methionine at a concentration of 2.5 mg/mL was able to stabilize 3.5 mCi of 177 Lu-A against radiolysis for 5 days.
  • EXAMPLE 2 show that methionine is unable to stabilize the same complex when the amount of radioactivity is increased to 50 mCi. Almost complete decomposition of the complex was observed over 5 days, when only L-methionine was used as a stabilizer.
  • HSA Human Serum Albumin
  • Control Phosphosaline buffer, pH 7.0
  • Reagents 1-5 have been reported previously to be potentially useful as stabilizers for radiopharmaceuticals.
  • Reagents 6-8 are compounds that were tested to determine their ability to serve as reducing agents for any methionine sulfoxide residues that formed as a result of radiolysis.
  • Reagent 9 was used in the unstabilized control.
  • 177 Lu-A was prepared by adding 300 ⁇ L of 0.2 M NaOAc (pH 5.0), 40 ⁇ g Compound A and 20 mCi of 177 LuCl 3 into a reaction vial. The mixture was incubated at 100° C. for five minutes, and then cooled to room temperature. Free 177 Lu was scavenged by adding 10 ⁇ L of 10% Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O. A 504 aliquot of the reaction solution ( ⁇ 3.5 mCi) and 100 ⁇ L of a 10 mg/mL solution of one of the reagents above in 10 mM, pH 7.0 PBS was added into a 2-mL autosampler vial.
  • the solution was adjusted to contain 10% Ethanol, 2% Hypophosphorous acid, or 2% Mercaptoethanol.
  • the final radioactivity concentration was about 20 mCi/mL.
  • the samples were stored in the autosampler chamber, and their stability was analyzed over time. The results obtained are shown in Table 5 below.
  • Table 5 above shows the results of a comparative study to determine the radiostabilizing effect of several compounds when added to 177 Lu-A after complex formation. Both the ability of these additives to prevent a decrease in RCP and their ability to inhibit the oxidation of the Methionine residue in 177 Lu-A were studied.
  • a Radiolysis Protecting Solution was prepared to contain 10 mg/mL gentisic acid; 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid sodium salt; 2 mg/mL HSA; 2.98 mg/mL L-methionine, 0.9% (v:v) benzyl alcohol and 1 mg/mL of Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O in 0.05 M, pH 5.3 citrate buffer.
  • To a 7-mL vial were added 0.2M NaOAc buffer (1.0 mL, pH 5.0), Compound A or Compound B ( ⁇ 70 ⁇ g) and 50 mCi of 177 LuCl 3 . The mixture was incubated at 100° C. for 5 min, and then cooled to room temperature with a water bath.
  • 177 Lu-A and 177 Lu-B were prepared at a 50 mCi level as described in EXAMPLE 4. Immediately after cooling the reaction mixtures to room temperature, 1 mL of a Radiolysis Protecting solution was added, containing 10 mg/mL gentisic acid; 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid sodium salt; 2 mg/mL HSA; 3.92 mg/mL L-selenomethionine, 0.9% (v:v) benzyl alcohol and 1 mg/mL of Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O in 0.05 M, pH 5.3 citrate buffer. The reaction vials were stored in the autosampler chamber and the stability was analyzed by RP-HPLC over time using HPLC Methods 3 [ 177 Lu-A] or 4 [ 177 Lu-B]. The results are shown in Table 7 below.
  • 177 Lu-A and 177 Lu-B were prepared at a 50 mCi level as described in EXAMPLE 4. Immediately after cooling the reaction mixtures to room temperature, 1 mL of a Radiolysis Protecting Solution was added, containing 10 mg/mL gentisic Acid; 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid sodium salt, 2 mg/mL HSA, (2 mg/mL or 3.52 mg/mL) L-cysteine, 0.9% (v/v) benzyl alcohol and 1 mg/mL of Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O in 0.05 M, pH 5.3 citrate buffer.
  • a Radiolysis Protecting Solution containing 10 mg/mL gentisic Acid; 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid sodium salt, 2 mg/mL HSA, (2 mg/mL or 3.52 mg/mL) L-cysteine, 0.9% (v/v) benzyl alcohol and 1 mg/mL of Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O in 0.05 M, pH 5.3 citrate buffer.
  • reaction vials were stored in the autosampler chamber and the stability was analyzed by RP-HPLC over time using HPLC Methods 3 [ 177 Lu-A] or 4 [ 177 Lu-B]. The results obtained for 177 Lu-A are shown in Table 8 below. Similar results were obtained for 177 Lu-B.
  • 177 Lu-A was prepared at a 50 mCi level as described in EXAMPLE 4. Immediately after cooling the reaction mixture to room temperature, 1 mL of a Radiolysis Protecting Solution was added, that contained 10 mg/mL gentisic acid; 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid sodium salt; 2 mg/mL HSA; 0.9% (v:v) benzyl alcohol and 1 mg/mL of Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O in 0.05 M, pH 5.3 citrate buffer. The reaction vial was stored in an autosampler chamber and the stability was analyzed by RP-HPLC over time. The results are shown in Table 9 below.
  • 177 Lu-B was formulated as follows: To a 5-mL glass vial, 1 mL of 0.2 M NaOAc buffer (pH 4.8), 12 ⁇ L (50 mCi) of 177 LuCl 3 and 30 pt of a 5 mg/mL solution of COMPOUND B in 0.01N HCl were added, and the vial was heated at 100° C. for 5 min.
  • the reaction mixture was diluted 1:1 by addition of 1 mL of one of the stabilizing solutions below.
  • the samples were then stored in an autosampler (which maintained an average temperature that was ⁇ 6° C. higher than room temperature) and analyzed by RP-HPLC for up to 120 hours.
  • HSA Human Serum Albumin
  • 177 Lu-B concentration is 25 mCi/mL: 177 Lu-B diluted 1:1 with the indicated Stabilizing (% RCP) Solution 0-h 3-h 6-h 9-h 12-h 24-h 48-h 72-h 120-h Stabilizing Solution a 100 88.3 59.6 39.1 24.0 2.9 0 0 0 100 mg/mL HSA Stabilizing Solution b 99.9 99.9 99.7 99.1 98.7 96.1 93.6 92.0 91.7 100 mg/mL AA Stabilizing Solution c 99.9 99.9 99.8 99.1 98.1 96.0 92.5 92.8 92.2 50 mg/mL AA + BA
  • Example 8 The results of Example 8 above indicate that either HSA alone or ascorbic acid alone could not maintain an RCP of >95% for times longer than 24 hours.
  • Example 1-8 indicate that a Radiolysis Protecting Solution containing gentisic acid, ascorbic acid, Human Serum Albumin, benzyl alcohol and either cysteine, selenomethionine, or methionine and (ethanol in 0.05M citrate buffer) will stabilize 177 Lu-A or 177 Lu-B if added after labeling, and that such a mixture will provide better radiostability than any of the reagents when added in isolation.
  • each of the reagents in the stabilizing buffer was tested individually by adding 1.0 mg/mL of the individual reagent directly to radiolabeling reactions containing a small amount of radioactivity (3.5 mCi). None interfered with the labeling reaction, but only selenomethionine and methionine showed good protection over time at the low radioactivity levels used.
  • Each individual stabilizer was prepared at a concentration of 1 mg/mL in sodium acetate (NaOAc) buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.8). To lead-shielded 4-mL vials was added 200 pt of the individual NaOAc-stabilizer solutions, 2.72-3.64 mCi 177 LuCl 3 and 4.6-6 ⁇ g COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1 for all samples. The reaction mixture was heated to 100° C. for 5 minutes, and then cooled for 5 minutes in an ambient-temperature water bath. To each sample, 10 ⁇ L of 2% Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O in water was added, and then each was divided into two 100-4 aliquots.
  • NaOAc sodium acetate
  • reagents in the stabilizing buffer were tested individually by adding 2.5 mg/mL (Example 10) or 5.0 mg/mL (Example 11) of the individual reagents directly to radiolabeling reactions containing a small amount of radioactivity (3.5 mCi).
  • the amount of stabilizers was increased to 2.5 mg/mL and 5 mg/mL to decrease the potential for radiolytic damage at high activity levels, it was found again that gentisic acid, ascorbic acid and cysteine could not provide adequate radioprotection for 24 hours, even at radioactivity amounts less than 5 mCi.
  • Each stabilizer was prepared at a concentration of 2.5 mg/mL in sodium acetate (NaOAc) buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.8). To lead-shielded 4-mL vials was added 200 ⁇ L of the individual NaOAc-stabilizer solutions, 3.58 mCi 177 LuCl 3 (avg) and 5.08 ⁇ g COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1 for all samples. The reaction mixtures were heated to 100° C. for 5 minutes, then cooled, treated with Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O, subdivided and stored as described in Example 9. The radiochemical purity (RCP) percentage data obtained are listed in Table 12.
  • RCP radiochemical purity
  • Each stabilizer was prepared at a concentration of 5 mg/mL in sodium acetate (NaOAc) buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.8). To lead-shielded 4-mL vials were added 200 ⁇ L of the individual stabilizer solutions, 3.55 mCi 177 LuCl 3 (avg) and 5.44 ⁇ g COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). A second set of replicates of each sample was prepared, using the individual stabilizers. To these was added 4.37 mCi 177 LuCl 3 (avg) and 6.7 ⁇ g (avg) COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to lutetium was 3:1 for all samples. The reaction mixture was heated to 100° C.
  • Each individual stabilizer was prepared at a concentration of 10 mg/mL in water. Ethionamide was dissolved in EtOH. To a lead-shielded 4-mL vial was added 500 ⁇ L of NaOAc buffer (0.2M, pH 4.8), 19.6 mCi 177 LuCl 3 and 30 ⁇ g COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1. The reaction mixture was heated to 100° C. for 5 minutes, then cooled for 5 minutes in an ambient-temperature water bath.
  • each of the stabilizers provided stability for 177 Lu-A at a radioconcentration of 13.9 mCi/mL for up to 48 hours of storage.
  • Example 12 compounds containing the —C ⁇ S moiety [dithiocarbamates and ethionamide] were added after radiolabeling, and found to be effective radiostabilizers. In Example 13, these compounds were added directly to the reaction mixture before or at the time of radiolabeling.
  • 10 mg/mL solutions of thiamine hydrochloride and L-glutathione were prepared by dissolving them in water.
  • 10 mg/mL solutions of 3-hydroxycinnamic acid, 4-hydroxyantipyrine and acetylsalicylic acid were prepared by dissolving them in 50% EtOH/water.
  • 10 mg/mL solutions of 2-hydroxybenzothiazole and 2,1,3-benzothiadiazole were prepared by dissolving them in EtOH.
  • cysteine has been used as an antioxidant for many drugs that contain oxidizable residues.
  • cysteine alone was found to interfere with radiolabeling if added directly to reaction mixtures for the preparation of 177 Lu-A (Example 11), and to be partially effective if added after the 177 Lu complex was formed.
  • the cysteine methyl and ethyl esters which have not previously been reported as stabilizers in radiopharmaceuticals, provided better radiostabilization under the conditions tested.
  • PDTC 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt
  • the molar ratio of COMPOUND A:Lu (total Lu) for each sample was 3:1.
  • the concentration of COMPOUND A was 287- ⁇ g/mL and the activity concentration was 167-mCi/mL.
  • the samples were heated to 100° C. for 5 minutes, then cooled for 5 minutes in an ambient-temperature water bath.
  • the table below shows the results obtained.
  • 177 Lu-B was formulated as follows: To a 5-mL glass vial was added 5 mg of PDTC dissolved in 1 mL 0.2 M NaOAc buffer (pH 4.8), 15 ⁇ L (44 mCi) of 177 LuCl 3 and 30 ⁇ L of a 5 mg/mL solution of COMPOUND B in 0.01N HCl. The reaction vial was crimp-sealed and heated at 100° C. for 5 min. After cooling with a water bath, 1 mL of Bacteriostatic 0.9% NaCl, Injection containing 0.9% Benzyl Alcohol and 1 mg/mL Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O was added. The sample was stored in an autosampler in which the temperature is ⁇ 6° C. higher than room temperature, and analyzed by RP-HPLC for up to 24 hours. The table below shows the results obtained.
  • L-Selenomethionine 177 Lu-B was prepared, diluted and analyzed as described above, but 5 mg of L-Se-Met was used in place of PDTC, the heating time was 10 minutes, and the quantity of radioactivity used was 52 mCi.
  • L-cysteine ethyl ester, HCl: 177 Lu-B was prepared, diluted and analyzed as described above, but 5 mg of L-CEE, hydrochloride salt was used in place of PDTC, the heating time was 8 minutes and the quantity of radioactivity used was 50 mCi.
  • L-cysteine.HCl.H 2 O: 177 Lu-B was prepared, diluted and analyzed as described above, but 5 mg of L-Cys HCl.H 2 O was used in place of PDTC, the heating time was 8 minutes and the quantity of radioactivity used was 53 mCi.
  • 177 LuCl 3 isotope solutions are contaminated with non-radioactive metals that can interfere with radiolabeling. These metals (which may include, for example Zn, Cu, Ca and Fe among others), can compete with 177 Lu for the chelator, thus lowering reaction yields by consuming ligand so it is unavailable for chelation to 177 Lu.
  • Studies of the labeling yield of 177 Lu A in the presence of PDTC with and without added Zinc show clearly that addition of PDTC to reaction mixtures containing added Zn prevents interference of this contaminating metal.
  • a 10-mg/mL solution of 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt was prepared by dissolving it in sodium acetate buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.8). To a lead-shielded, 300- ⁇ L sample vial was added 86.5 ⁇ L of the NaOAc buffer solution, 13.7 mCi 177 LuCl 3 , 0.6525 ⁇ g zinc (6.52 ⁇ L of a 100- ⁇ g/mL zinc plasma standard solution) and 15 ⁇ g COMPOUND B (dissolved in water).
  • Example 1 To another lead-shielded, 300- ⁇ L sample vial was added 86.5 ⁇ L of the 10- ⁇ g/mL 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt/NaOAc buffer solution, 13.8 mCi 177 LuCl 3 , 0.6525 ⁇ g zinc and 15 ⁇ g COMPOUND B. This was labeled as ‘Sample 2.’
  • the concentration of COMPOUND B in each sample was 150 ⁇ g/mL and the molar ratio of COMPOUND B: 177 Lu:Zinc for each sample was 3:1:3.
  • the samples were heated to 100° C. for 5 min, and then cooled for 5 min in an ambient-temperature water bath.
  • 10 ⁇ L of 2% Na 2 EDTA.2H 2 O in water was added, and then each was analyzed by HPLC, using HPLC Method 5.
  • FIG. 10 shows the results obtained.
  • FIG. 10A shows an HPLC chromatogram of COMPOUND B (UV), which has a retention time of 15.4 min. in the system used.
  • FIG. 10B shows a radiochromatogram (top) and UV chromatogram (bottom) of Sample 1 (control reaction; no PDTC); which was obtained following the reaction of COMPOUND B with 177 Lu in the presence of zinc.
  • the resulting RCP was 0%.
  • the primary product formed was the zinc complex of COMPOUND B, which has a retention time of 17.3 minutes. Very little COMPOUND B remains, and very little 177 Lu-B was formed.
  • FIGS. 10A-10C demonstrate that 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt is effective in serving to scavenge adventitious trace metals in the reaction mixture, as radiochemical purity obtained is dramatically improved when PDTC is added to labeling reactions containing an excess of zinc.
  • a solution of L-selenomethionine (20 mg/mL) was prepared by dissolving it in NaOAc buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.0). To a lead-shielded 2-mL vial was added 111 ⁇ L of NaOAc buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.0), 25 ⁇ L selenomethionine solution (0.5 mg of Se-Met), 4 ⁇ L of COMPOUND B (20 ⁇ g in 0.01 N HCl) and 1.0 mCi 111 InCl 3 in 60 ⁇ l, of 0.05 N HCl. A control reaction was run containing all reagents above, but substituting NaOAc buffer for the Se-Met solution. The reaction mixtures were heated at 100° C.
  • Solvent A 0.1% TFA in water
  • Solvent B 0.085% TFA in acetonitrile.
  • Gradient 80% A/20% B isocratic for 20 min, ramp up to 40% A/60% B in 5 min, hold for 5 mM, return to 80% A/20% B in 5 min.
  • 177 Lu-B was formulated as follows: To a 5-mL glass vial was added 2.94 mg of L-Selenomethionine dissolved in 1 mL of 0.2 M NaOAc buffer (pH 4.8), 25 ⁇ L (110.5 mCi) of 177 LuCl 3 and 30 ⁇ L of a 5 mg/mL solution of COMPOUND B in 0.01N HCl. The reaction vial was crimp-sealed and heated at 100° C. for 10 min.
  • a 100 ⁇ L aliquot of 0.2M NaOAc buffer, pH 4.8 containing 1 mg/mL L-selenomethionine and 13 ⁇ g of Compound B was added to each of two 2-mL sample vials, designated Sample 1 and Sample 2, respectively. Approximately 10 mCi of 177 LuCl 3 was added to each vial and the samples were heated at 100° C. for 10 minutes in a temperature-controlled heating block. They were then removed and cooled in an ambient temperature water bath for 5 minutes. After cooling, 400 ⁇ L of Solution A was added to Sample 1, and 400 ⁇ L of Solution B was added to Sample 2.
  • Sulfur compounds, particularly thiols, in the oxidation state +2 were evaluated for the ability to convert methionine oxide residues to the reduced methionyl form.
  • the methionine oxidized form of Compound B was synthesized. This oxidized compound is referred to as Compound C.
  • Compound C was radiolabelled to form 177 Lu-C, which was mixed with various +2 sulfur derivatives, stored at room temperature and analyzed over time to determine how much methionine oxide in the peptide had been converted to methionine.
  • Mercaptoethanol, cysteine and dithiothreitol are thiols, methionine is a thioether, and selenomethionine is an organic 2+ selenium compound. The latter two solutions were used as controls.
  • 177 Lu-C In a 2-mL glass vial, 200 ⁇ l of 0.2 M, pH 4.8 NaOAc buffer, 30 ⁇ g Compound C [in 30 uL of 0.01 N HCl] and 5.6 mCi 177 LuCl 3 were added. After incubation at 85° C. for 10 min, the reaction vial was cooled to room temperature with a water bath, and then 20 ⁇ l of 2% EDTA was added to challenge any free Lu-177 that remained.
  • Sample preparation Aliquots [40 ⁇ l, 0.75 mCi] of this reaction solution were mixed with a 100 ⁇ l aliquot of one of the solutions above, e.g., 20 mg/ml Cys; DTT; Met; Se-Met; or 2% ME. The solutions were stored at room temperature over time and analyzed by RP-HPLC at 1 and 3 days. The results obtained are shown in Table 25 below.

Abstract

Stabilized radiopharmaceutical formulations are disclosed. Methods of making and using stabilized radiopharmaceutical formulations are also disclosed. The invention relates to stabilizers that improve the radiostability of radiotherapeutic and radiodiagnostic compounds, and formulations containing them. In particular, it relates to stabilizers useful in the preparation and stabilization of targeted radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic compounds, and, in a preferred embodiment, to the preparation and stabilization of radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic compounds that are targeted to the Gastrin Releasing Peptide Receptor (GRP-Receptor).

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
  • This application claims benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/489,850 filed Jul. 24, 2003, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • FIELD OF THE MENTION
  • This invention relates to stabilizers that improve the radiostability of radiotherapeutic and radiodiagnostic compounds, and formulations containing them. In particular, it relates to stabilizers useful in the preparation and stabilization of targeted radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic compounds, and, in a preferred embodiment, to the preparation and stabilization of radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic compounds that are targeted to the Gastrin Releasing Peptide Receptor (GRP-Receptor).
  • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Radiolabeled compounds designed for use as radiodiagnostic agents are generally prepared with a gamma-emitting isotope as the radiolabel. These gamma photons penetrate water and body tissues readily and can have a range in tissue or air of many centimeters. In general, such radiodiagnostic compounds do not cause significant damage to the organ systems that are imaged using these agents. This is because the gamma photons given off have no mass or charge and the amount of radioactive material that is injected is limited to the quantity required to obtain a diagnostic image, generally in the range of about 3 to 50 mCi, depending on the isotope and imaging agent used. This quantity is small enough to obtain useful images without significant radiation dose to the patient. Radionuclides such as 99mTc, 111In, 123I, 67Ga and 64Cu have been used for this purpose.
  • In contrast, radiolabeled compounds designed for use as radiotherapeutic agents are generally labeled with an Auger-, beta- or an alpha-emitting isotope, which may optionally also give off gamma photons. Radionuclides such as 90Y, 177Lu, 149Pm, 153Sm, 109Pd, 67Cu, 166Ho, 131I, 32P, 186/188Re, 105Rh, 211At, 225Ac, 47Sc, 213Bi, and others, are potentially useful for radiotherapy. The +3 metal ions of the lanthanide isotopes are of particular interest, and include 177Lu (relatively low energy β-emitter), 149Pm, 153Sm (medium energy) and 166Ho (high energy). 90Y also forms a +3 metal ion, and has coordination chemistry that is similar to that of the lanthanides. The coordination chemistry of the lanthanides is well developed and well known to those skilled in the art.
  • The ionizing radiation given off from compounds labeled with these radioisotopes is of an appropriate energy to damage cells and tissue in sites where the radiolabelled compound has localized. The radiation emitted can either damage cellular components in the target tissue directly, or can cause water in tissues to form free radicals. These radicals are very reactive and can damage proteins and DNA.
  • Some of the immediate products that form from the radiolysis of water are outlined below.

  • H2O→H2O+ +e

  • H2O+→H++OH*

  • H2O+e →H2O→H*+OH
  • Of the products that form, (e.g. H+, OH, H*, and OH*), the hydroxyl radical [OH*] is particularly destructive. This radical can also combine with itself to form hydrogen peroxide, which is a strong oxidizer.

  • OH*+OH*→H2O2 (strong oxidizer)
  • In addition, interaction of ionizing radiation with dissolved oxygen can generate very reactive species such as superoxide radicals. These radicals are very reactive towards organic molecules (see, e.g. Garrison, W. M., Chem. Rev. 1987, 87, 381-398).
  • Production of such reactive species at the site or sites that the radiotherapeutic or radiodiagnostic compound is targeted to (e.g., a tumor, bone metastasis, blood cells or other targeted organ or organ system) will, if produced in sufficient quantity, have a cytostatic or cytotoxic effect. The key factor for successful radiotherapy is the delivery of enough radiation dose to the targeted tissue (e.g, tumor cells, etc.) to cause a cytotoxic or tumoricidal effect, without causing significant or intolerable side effects. Similarly, for a radiodiagnostic, the key factor is delivery of sufficient radiation to the target tissue to image it without causing significant or intolerable side effects.
  • Alpha particles dissipate a large amount of energy within one or two cell diameters, as their range of penetration in tissues is only ˜50 μM. This can cause intense local damage, especially if the radiolabeled compound has been internalized into the nucleus of the cell. Likewise, radiotherapeutic compounds labeled with Auger-electron emitters such as 111In have a very short range and can have potent biological effects at the desired site of action. The emissions from therapeutic beta-emitting isotopes such as 177Lu or 90Y have somewhat longer ranges in tissue, but again, most of the damage produced occurs within a few millimeters or centimeters from the site of localization.
  • However, the potentially destructive properties of the emissions of a radiotherapeutic isotope are not limited to their cellular targets. For radiotherapeutic and radiodiagnostic compounds, radiolytic damage to the radiolabeled compound itself can be a serious problem during the preparation, purification, storage and/or shipping of a radiolabeled radiotherapeutic or radiodiagnostic compound, prior to its intended use.
  • Such radiolytic damage can cause, for example, release of the radioisotope [e.g., by dehalogenation of radioiodinated antibodies or decomposition of the chelating moiety designed to hold the radiometal], or it can damage the targeting molecule that is required to deliver the targeted agent to its intended target. Both types of damage are highly undesirable as they can potentially cause the release of unbound isotope, e.g., free radioiodine or unchelated radiometal to the thyroid, bone and other organs, or cause a decrease or abolishment of targeting ability as a result of radiolytic damage to the targeting molecule, such as a receptor-binding region of a targeting peptide or radiolabeled antibody. Radioactivity that does not become associated with its target tissue may be responsible for unwanted side effects.
  • For example, DOTA-Gly-ACA-Gln-Trp-Ala-Val-Gly-His-Leu-Met-NH2 (ACA=3-Amino-3-deoxycholic acid) and DOTA-Gly-Abz4-Gln-Trp-Ala-Val-Gly-His-Leu-Met-NH2 (Abz4=4-aminobenzoic acid) the two chelating ligands shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, respectively, have been shown to specifically target the Gastrin Releasing Peptide (GRP) Receptors. In the examples that follow, these have been described as Compounds A and Compound B respectively. Other GRP receptor-binding ligands are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,200,546, to Hoffman et al., published U.S. application U.S. 2002/0054855, and in copending application Ser. No. 10/341,577, filed Jan. 13, 2003, the entire contents of which are incorporated by reference.
  • When radiolabeled with diagnostic and radiotherapeutic radionuclides such as 111In and 177Lu, Compounds A and B have been shown to have high affinity for GRP receptors, both in vitro and in vivo. However, these compounds can undergo significant radiolytic damage that is induced by the radioactive label if these radiolabeled complexes are prepared without concomitant or subsequent addition of one or more radiostabilizers (compounds that protect against radiolytic damage). This result is not surprising, as the hydroxyl and superoxide radicals generated by the interaction of β-particles with water are highly oxidizing. Radiolytic damage to the methionine (Met) residue in these peptides is the most facile mode of decomposition, possibly resulting in a methionine sulfoxide derivative.
  • Cell binding results show that the resulting radiolytically damaged derivatives are devoid of GRP-receptor binding activity (IC50 values greater than micromolar). Hence, it is critical to find inhibitors of radiolysis that can be used to prevent both methionine oxidation and other radiolytic decomposition routes in radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic compounds.
  • Preventing such radiolytic damage is a major challenge in the formulation of radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic compounds. For this purpose, compounds known as radical scavengers or antioxidants are typically used. These are compounds that react rapidly with, e.g., hydroxyl radicals and superoxide, thus preventing them from reaction with the radiopharmaceutical of interest or reagents for its preparation.
  • There has been extensive research in this area. Most of it has focused on the prevention of radiolytic damage in radiodiagnostic formulations, and several radical scavengers have been proposed for such use. However, it has been found in the studies described herein that the stabilizers reported to be effective by others, provide insufficient radiostabilization to protect 177Lu-A and 177Lu-B, the Lutetium complexes of Compounds A and B, respectively, from radiolytic damage, especially when high concentrations and large amounts of radioactivity are used.
  • For example, Cyr and Pearson [Stabilization of radiopharmaceutical compositions using hydrophilic thioethers and hydrophilic 6-hydroxy chromans. Cyr, John E.; Pearson, Daniel A. (Diatide, Inc., USA). PCT Int. Appl. (2002), WO 200260491 A2 20020808] state that diagnostic and therapeutic radiopharmaceutical compositions radiolabeled with 125I, 131I, 211At, 47Sc, 67Cu, 72Ga, 90Y, 153Sm, 159Gd, 165Dy, 166Ho, 175Yb, 177Lu, 212Bi, 213Bi, 68Ga, 99mTc, 111In and 123I can be stabilized by the addition of a hydrophilic thioether, and that the amino acid methionine, a hydrophilic thioether, is especially useful for this purpose.
  • A study was therefore performed wherein L-methionine (5 mg/mL) was added to 177Lu-A, to evaluate its ability to serve as a radical scavenger. As will be described in more detail below, reverse phase HPLC shows that after five days, almost complete decomposition of 177Lu-A had occurred, indicating that the radiostabilizer used was insufficient to prevent radiolytic damage. In vitro binding results indicate that such decomposition can dramatically decrease the potency and targeting ability, and hence the radiotherapeutic efficacy, of the compound thus damaged. To attain the desired radiotherapeutic effect, one would need to inject more radioactivity, thus increasing the potential for toxicity to normal organs.
  • In order to identify suitable antioxidant radical scavengers that might be useful for the radiostabilization of GRP-receptor binding radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic compounds, several studies were performed. One or more potential radiostabilizers was added after complex formation (a two-vial formulation) or they were added directly to the reaction mixture prior to complexation with a radiometal (or both). Ideally, the radiostabilizer should be able to be added directly to the formulation without significantly decreasing the radiochemical purity (RCP) of the product, as such a formulation has the potential to be a single-vial kit.
  • The radical scavengers identified as a result of these studies have general utility in formulations for the preparation of compounds used for a variety of radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic applications, and may be useful to stabilize compounds radiolabeled with a variety of isotopes, e.g., 99mTc, 186/188Re, 111In, 90Y, 177Lu, 213Bi, 225Ac, 166Ho and others. The primary focus of the examples in this application is the radiostabilization of GRP-binding peptides, and in particular, the radioprotection of methionine residues in these molecules. However, the stabilizers identified should have applicability to a wide range of radiolabeled peptides, peptoids, small molecules, proteins, antibodies, and antibody fragments and the like. They are useful for the radioprotection of any compound that has a residue or residues that are particularly sensitive to radiolytic damage, such as, for example, tryptophan (oxidation of the indole ring), tyrosine (oxidative dimerization, or other oxidation), histidine, cysteine (oxidation of thiol group) and to a lesser extent serine, threonine, glutamic acid, and aspartic acid. Unusual amino acids commonly used in peptides or drugs that contain sensitive functional groups (indoles, imidazoles, thiazoles, furans, thiophenes and other heterocycles) could also be protected.
  • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • It is the aim of this invention to provide stabilizers and stabilizer combinations that slow or prevent radiolytic damage to targeted radiotherapeutic and radiodiagnostic radiolabeled compounds, especially compounds labeled with radiometals, and thus preserve the targeting ability and specificity of the compounds. It is also an aim to present formulations containing these stabilizers. As described by the examples below, many stabilizers have been identified that, alone or in combination, inhibit radiolytic damage to radiolabeled compounds. At this time, four approaches are particularly preferred. In the first approach, a radiolysis stabilizing solution containing a mixture of the following ingredients is added to the radiolabeled compound immediately following the radiolabeling reaction: gentisic acid, ascorbic acid, human serum albumin, benzyl alcohol, a physiologically acceptable buffer or salt solution at a pH of about 4.5 to about 8.5, and one or more amino acids selected from methionine, selenomethionine, selenocysteine, or cysteine).
  • The physiologically acceptable buffer or salt solution is preferably selected from phosphate, citrate, or acetate buffers or physiologically acceptable sodium chloride solutions or a mixture thereof, at a molarity of from about 0.02M to about 0.2M. The reagent benzyl alcohol is a key component in this formulation and serves two purposes. For compounds that have limited solubility, one of its purposes is to solubilize the radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic targeted compound in the reaction solution, without the need for added organic solvents. Its second purpose is to provide a bacteriostatic effect. This is important, as solutions that contain the radiostabilizers of the invention are expected to have long post-reconstitution stability, so the presence of a bacteriostat is critical in order to maintain sterility. The amino acids methionine, selenomethionine, cysteine, and selenocysteine play a special role in preventing radiolytic damage to methionyl residues in targeted molecules that are stabilized with this radiostabilizing combination.
  • In the second approach, stabilization is achieved via the use of dithiocarbamate compounds having the following general formula:
  • Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00001
  • wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H, C1-C8 alkyl, —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl, or benzyl (Bn) (either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups),
    or wherein R1R2N combined=1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl- and M=Na+, K+, NH4 +, M-methylglucamine, or other pharmaceutically acceptable +1 ions.
  • Alternatively, compounds of the form shown below may be used, wherein M is a physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state, such as Mg2+ or Ca2+, and R1 and R2 have the same definition as described above.
  • Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00002
  • These reagents can either be added directly into reaction mixtures during radiolabeled complex preparation, or added after complexation is complete, or both.
  • The compound 1-Pyrrolidine Dithiocarbamic Acid Ammonium salt (PDTC) proved most efficacious as a stabilizer, when either added directly to the reaction mixture or added after complex formation. These results were unexpected, as the compound has not been reported for use as a stabilizer for radiopharmaceuticals prior to these studies. Dithiocarbamates, and PDTC in particular, have the added advantage of serving to scavenge adventitious trace metals in the reaction mixture.
  • In the third approach, formulations contain stabilizers that are water soluble organic selenium compounds wherein the selenium is in the oxidation state +2. Especially preferred are the amino acid compounds selenomethionine, and selenocysteine and their esters and amide derivatives and dipeptides and tri peptides thereof, which can either be added directly to the reaction mixture during radiolabeled complex preparation, or following complex preparation. The flexibility of having these stabilizers in the vial at the time of labeling or in a separate vial extends the utility of this invention for manufacturing radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic kits.
  • It is highly efficacious to use these selenium compounds in combination with sodium ascorbate or other pharmaceutically acceptable forms of ascorbic acid and its derivatives.
  • The ascorbate is most preferably added after complexation is complete. Alternatively, it can be used as a component of the stabilizing formulation described above. A fourth approach involves the use of water soluble sulfur-containing compounds wherein the sulfur in the +2 oxidation state. Preferred thiol compounds include derivatives of cysteine, mercaptothanol, and dithiolthreotol. These reagents are particularly preferred due to their ability to reduce oxidized forms of methionine residues (e.g., methionine oxide residues) back to methionyl residues, thus restoring oxidative damage that has occurred as a result of radiolysis. With these thiol compounds, it is highly efficacious to use these stabilizing reagents in combination with sodium ascorbate or other pharmaceutically acceptable forms of ascorbic acid and its derivatives. The ascorbate is most preferably added after complexation is complete.
  • The stabilizers and stabilizer combinations may be used to improve the radiolytic stability of targeted radiopharmaceuticals, comprising peptides, non-peptidic small molecules, radiolabeled proteins, radiolabeled antibodies and fragments thereof. These stabilizers are particularly useful with the class of GRP-binding compounds described herein.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 shows the structure of Compound A.
  • FIG. 2 shows the structure of Compound B.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates the results of an HPLC analysis of a mixture of 177Lu-A with 2.5 mg/mL L-Methionine over 5 days at room temperature at a radioconcentration of 25 mCi/mL. [50 mCi total]. FIG. 3A is a radiochromatogram of a reaction mixture for the preparation of 177Lu-A, which was initially formed in >98% yield. FIG. 3B is radiochromatogram of [177Lu-A], 25 mCi/mL, after five days at room temperature, demonstrating complete radiolytic destruction of the desired compound. The radiostabilizer added (5 mg/mL L-Methionine) was clearly insufficient for the level of radioprotection required.
  • FIG. 4 is an HPLC trace [radiodetection] showing that 177Lu-B (104 mCi) has >99% RCP for 5 days when diluted 1:1 with radiolysis protecting solution that was added after the complex was formed.
  • FIG. 5 is an HPLC trace [radiodetection] showing that 177Lu-A has >95% RCP for 5 days at a concentration of 55 mCi/2 mL if 1 mL of radiolysis protecting solution is added after the complex was formed.
  • FIG. 6A and FIG. 6B show the structure of the methionine sulfoxide derivative of 177Lu-A (FIG. 6A) and methionine sulfoxide derivative of 111In-B (FIG. 6B).
  • FIG. 7A and FIG. 7B show stabilizer studies 177Lu-A (FIG. 7A) and 177Lu-B (FIG. 7B). Radioactivity traces are shown from a study to compare the radiostabilizing effect of different amino acids, when added to 177Lu-A (FIG. 7A) and 177Lu-B (FIG. 7B) at an amino acid concentration of 6.6 mg/mL in 10 mM Dulbecco's phosphate buffered saline, pH 7.0 [PBS], and a radioactivity concentration of 20 mCi/mL, after 48 hours of storage at room temperature. A total of 3.5 mCi of 177Lu was added to each vial. A full description of the experimental procedure is given in Example 1.
  • FIG. 8 shows an HPLC trace [radiodetection] showing the radiostability of 177Lu-A over 5 days at room temperature at a radioconcentration of 25 mCi/mL in presence of 2.5 mg/mL L-methionine (50 mCi total). The details of this study are given in Example 2.
  • FIG. 9 shows an HPLC trace [radiodetection] showing the stability of 177Lu-B at a concentration of 50 mCi/2 mL in a radiolysis protecting solution containing L-methionine. The details of this study are given in Example 4.
  • FIGS. 10A-C show radiochromatograms and UV chromatograms comparing samples with and without 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt in the reaction buffer and containing zinc as a contaminant metal during the reaction of 177Lu-B. The experimental procedure for this study is given in Example 20.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • In the following description, various aspects of the present invention will be further elaborated. For purposes of explanation, specific configurations and details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the present invention. However, it will also be apparent to one skilled in the art that the present invention may be practiced without the specific details.
  • Furthermore, well known features may be omitted or simplified in order not to obscure the present invention.
  • 1. Metal Chelator
  • In some radiopharmaceuticals, the isotope is a non-metal, such as 123I, 131I or 18F, and is either coupled directly to the rest of the molecule or is bound to a linker. However, if the radioisotope used is a metal, it is generally incorporated into a metal chelator. The term “metal chelator” refers to a molecule that forms a complex with a metal atom. For radiodiagnostic and radiotherapeutic applications it is generally preferred that said complex is stable under physiological conditions. That is, the metal will remain complexed to the chelator backbone in vivo. In a preferred embodiment, a metal chelator is a molecule that complexes to a radionuclide metal to form a metal complex that is stable under physiological conditions and which also has at least one reactive functional group for conjugation with a targeting molecule, a spacer, or a linking group, as defined below. The metal chelator M may be any of the metal chelators known in the art for complexing a medically useful metal ion or radionuclide. The metal chelator may or may not be complexed with a metal radionuclide. Furthermore, the metal chelator can include an optional spacer such as a single amino acid (e.g., Gly) which does not complex with the metal, but which creates a physical separation between the metal chelator and the linker.
  • The metal chelators of the invention may include, for example, linear, macrocyclic, terpyridine, and N3S, N2S2, or N4 chelators (see also, U.S. Pat. No. 4,647,447, U.S. Pat. No. 4,957,939, U.S. Pat. No. 4,963,344, U.S. Pat. No. 5,367,080, U.S. Pat. No. 5,364,613, U.S. Pat. No. 5,021,556, U.S. Pat. No. 5,075,099, U.S. Pat. No. 5,886,142, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety), and other chelators known in the art including, but not limited to, HYNIC, DTPA, EDTA, DOTA, TETA, and bisamino bisthiol (BAT) chelators (see also U.S. Pat. No. 5,720,934). For example, macrocyclic chelators, and in particular N4 chelators are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,885,363; 5,846,519; 5,474,756; 6,143,274; 6,093,382; 5,608,110; 5,665,329; 5,656,254; and 5,688,487, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Certain N3S chelators are described in PCT/CA94/00395, PCT/CA94/00479, PCT/CA95/00249 and in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,662,885; 5,976,495; and 5,780,006, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. The chelator may also include derivatives of the chelating ligand mercapto-acetyl-glycyl-glycyl-glycine (MAG3), which contains an N3S, and N2S2 systems such as MAMA (monoamidemonoaminedithiols), DADS (N2S diaminedithiols), CODADS and the like. These ligand systems and a variety of others are described in Liu and Edwards, Chem. Rev. 1999, 99, 2235-2268; Caravan et al., Chem. Rev. 1999, 99, 2293-2352; and references therein, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety.
  • The metal chelator may also include complexes known as boronic acid adducts of technetium and rhenium dioximes, such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,183,653; 5,387,409; and 5,118,797, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein, in their entirety.
  • Examples of preferred chelators include, but are not limited to, derivatives of diethylenetriamine pentaacetic acid (DTPA), 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclotetradecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid (DOTA), 1-substituted 1,4,7,- tricarboxymethyl 1,4,7,10 tetraazacyclododecane triacetic acid (DO3A), derivatives of the 1-1-(1-carboxy-3-(p-nitrophenyl)propyl-1,4,7,10 tetraazacyclododecane triacetate (PA-DOTA) and MeO-DOTA, ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), and 1,4,8,11-tetraazacyclotetradecane-1,4,8,11-tetraacetic acid (TETA), derivatives of 3,3,9,9-Tetramethyl-4,8-diazaundecane-2,10-dione dioxime (PnAO); and derivatives of 3,3,9,9-Tetramethyl-5-oxa-4,8-diazaundecane-2,10-dione dioxime (oxa PnAO). Additional chelating ligands are ethylenebis-(2-hydroxy-phenylglycine) (EHPG), and derivatives thereof, including 5-C1-EHPG, 5-Br-EHPG, 5-Me-EHPG, 5-t-Bu-EHPG, and 5-sec-Bu-EHPG; benzodiethylenetriamine pentaacetic acid (benzo-DTPA) and derivatives thereof, including dibenzo-DTPA, phenyl-DTPA, diphenyl-DTPA, benzyl-DTPA, and dibenzyl-DTPA; bis-2 (hydroxybenzyl)-ethylene-diaminediacetic acid (HBED) and derivatives thereof; the class of macrocyclic compounds which contain at least 3 carbon atoms, more preferably at least 6, and at least two heteroatoms (O and/or N), which macrocyclic compounds can consist of one ring, or two or three rings joined together at the hetero ring elements, e.g., benzo-DOTA, dibenzo-DOTA, and benzo-NOTA, where NOTA is 1,4,7-triazacyclononane N,N′,N″-triacetic acid, benzo-TETA, benzo-DOTMA, where DOTMA is 1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclotetradecane-1,4,7,10-tetra(methyl tetraacetic acid), and benzo-TETMA, where TETMA is 1,4,8,11-tetraazacyclotetradecane-1,4,8,11-(methyl tetraacetic acid); derivatives of 1,3-propylenediaminetetraacetic acid (PDTA) and triethylenetetraaminehexaacetic acid (TTHA); derivatives of 1,5,10-N,N′,N″-tris(2,3-dihydroxybenzoyl)-tricatecholate (LICAM) and 1,3,5-N,N′,N″-tris(2,3-dihydroxybenzoyl)aminomethylbenzene (MECAM). Examples of representative chelators and chelating groups contemplated by the present invention are described in WO 98/18496, WO 86/06605, WO 91/03200, WO 95/28179, WO 96/23526, WO 97/36619, PCT/US98/01473, PCT/US98/20182, and U.S. Pat. No. 4,899,755, U.S. Pat. No. 5,474,756, U.S. Pat. No. 5,846,519 and U.S. Pat. No. 6,143,274, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • Particularly preferred metal chelators include those of Formula 1, 2 and 3a and 3b (for 111In, 90Y, and radioactive lanthanides, such as, for example 177Lu, 153Sm, and 166Ho) and those of Formula 4, 5 and 6 (for radioactive 99mTc, 186Re, and 188Re) set forth below.
  • These and other metal chelating groups are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,093,382 and 5,608,110, which are incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. Additionally, the chelating group of Formula 3 is described in, for example, U.S. Pat. No. 6,143,274; the chelating group of Formula 5 is described in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,627,286 and 6,093,382, and the chelating group of Formula 6 is described in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,662,885; 5,780,006; and 5,976,495, all of which are incorporated by reference. Specific metal chelators of Formula 6 include N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys; and other variations thereof. Spacers which do not actually complex with the metal radionuclide such as an extra single amino acid Gly, may be attached to these metal chelators (e.g., N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys-Gly; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly). Other useful metal chelators such as all of those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 6,334,996, are also incorporated by reference (e.g., Dimethylgly-L-t-Butylgly-L-Cys-Gly; Dimethylgly-D-t-Butylgly-L-Cys-Gly; Dimethylgly-L-t-Butylgly-L-Cys, etc.).
  • Furthermore, sulfur protecting groups such as Acm (acetamidomethyl), trityl or other known alkyl, aryl, acyl, alkanoyl, aryloyl, mercaptoacyl and organothiol groups may be attached to the cysteine amino acid of these metal chelators.
  • In particular, useful metal chelators include:
  • Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00003
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00004
  • In the above Formulas 1 and 2, R is hydrogen or alkyl, preferably methyl. In Formula 3b, R1 and R2 are as defined in U.S. Pat. No. 6,143,274, incorporated by reference herein its entirety. In the above Formula 5, X is either CH2 or O, Y is either C1-C10 branched or unbranched alkyl; Y is aryl, aryloxy, arylamino, arylaminoacyl; Y is arylalkyl—where the alkyl group or groups attached to the aryl group are C1-C10 branched or unbranched alkyl groups, C1-C10 branched or unbranched hydroxy or polyhydroxyalkyl groups or polyalkoxyalkyl or polyhydroxy-polyalkoxyalkyl groups, J is C(═O)—, OC(═O)—, SO2—, NC(═O)—, NC(═S)—, N(Y), NC(═NCH3)—, NC(═NH)—, N═N—, homopolyamides or heteropolyamines derived from synthetic or naturally occurring amino acids; all where n is 1-100. J may also be absent. Other variants of these structures are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. No. 6,093,382. In Formula 6, the group S—NHCOCH3 may be replaced with SH or S—Z wherein Z is any of the known sulfur protecting groups such as those described above. Formula 7 illustrates one embodiment of t-butyl compounds useful as a metal chelator. The disclosures of each of the foregoing patents, applications and references are incorporated by reference herein, in their entirety.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the metal chelator includes cyclic or acyclic polyaminocarboxylic acids such as DOTA (1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane-1,4,7,10-tetraacetic acid), DTPA (diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid), DTPA-bismethylamide, DTPA-bismorpholineamide, DO3A N-[[4,7,10-Tris(carboxymethyl)-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododec-1-yl]acetyl], HP-DO3A, DO3A-monoamide and derivatives thereof.
  • These chelating ligands encapsulate the radiometal by binding to it via multiple nitrogen and oxygen atoms, thus preventing the release of free (unbound) radiometal into the body. This is important, as in vivo dissociation of 3+ radiometals from their chelate can result in uptake of the radiometal in the liver, bone and spleen [Brechbiel M W, Gansow O A, “Backbone-substituted DTPA ligands for 90Y radioimmunotherapy”, Bioconj. Chem. 1991; 2: 187-194; Li, W P, Ma D S, Higginbotham C, Hoffman T, Ketring A R, Cutler C S, Jurisson, S S, “Development of an in vitro model for assessing the in vivo stability of lanthanide chelates.” Nucl. Med. Biol. 2001; 28(2): 145-154; Kasokat T, Urich K. Arzneim.-Forsch, “Quantification of dechelation of gadopentetate dimeglumine in rats.” 1992; 42(6): 869-76]. Unless one is specifically targeting these organs, such non-specific uptake is highly undesirable, as it leads to non-specific irradiation of non-target tissues, which can lead to such problems as hematopoietic suppression due to irradiation of bone marrow.
  • 2. Radioisotopes
  • Preferred radionuclides for scintigraphy or radiotherapy include 99mTc, 67Ga, 68Ga, 47SC, 51Cr, 167Tm, 141Ce, 111In, 123I, 125I, 131I, 18F, 11C, 15N, 168Yb, 175Yb, 140La, 90Y, 88Y, 86Y, 153Sm, 166Ho, 165Dy, 166Dy, 62Cu, 64Cu, 67Cu, 97Ru, 103Ru, 186Re, 188Re, 203Pb, 211Bi, 212Bi, 213Bi, 214Bi, 225Ac, 211At, 105Rh, 109Pd, 117mSn, 149Pm, 161Tb, 177Lu, 198Au, 199Au, and oxides or nitrides thereof. The choice of isotope will be determined based on the desired therapeutic or diagnostic application. For example, for diagnostic purposes (e.g., to diagnose and monitor therapeutic progress in primary tumors and metastases), the preferred radionuclides include 64Cu, 67Ga, 68Ga, 99mTc, and 111In, with 99mTc and 111In being especially preferred. For therapeutic purposes (e.g., to provide radiotherapy for primary tumors and metastasis related to cancers of the prostate, breast, lung, etc.), the preferred radionuclides include 64Cu, 90Y, 105Rh, 111In, 117mSn, 149Pm, 153Sm, 161Tb, 166Dy, 166Ho, 175Yb, 177Lu, 186/188Re, and 199Au, with 177Lu and 90Y being particularly preferred. 99mTc is particularly useful and is a preferred diagnostic radionuclide because of its low cost, availability, imaging properties, and high specific activity. The nuclear and radioactive properties of 99mTc make this isotope an ideal scintigraphic imaging agent. This isotope has a single photon energy of 140 keV and a radioactive half-life of about 6 hours, and is readily available from a 99Mo—99mTc generator. 111In is also particularly preferred diagnostic isotope, as this +3 metal ion has very similar chemistry to that of the radiotherapeutic +3 lanthanides, thus allowing the preparation of a diagnostic/therapeutic 111In/177Lu pair. Peptides labeled with 177Lu, 90Y or other therapeutic radionuclides can be used to provide radiotherapy for primary tumors and metastasis related to cancers of the prostate, breast, lung, etc., and 111In analogs can be used to detect the presence of such tumors. The selection of a proper nuclide for use in a particular radiotherapeutic application depends on many factors, including:
  • a. Physical half-life—This should be long enough to allow synthesis and purification of the radiotherapeutic construct from radiometal and conjugate, and delivery of said construct to the site of injection, without significant radioactive decay prior to injection. Preferably, the radionuclide should have a physical half-life between about 0.5 and 8 days.
  • b. Energy of the emission(s) from the radionuclide—Radionuclides that are particle emitters (such as alpha emitters and beta emitters) are particularly useful, as they emit highly energetic particles that deposit their energy over short distances, thereby producing highly localized damage. Beta emitting radionuclides are particularly preferred, as the energy from beta particle emissions from these isotopes is deposited within 5 to about 150 cell diameters. Radiotherapeutic agents prepared from these nuclides are capable of killing diseased cells that are relatively close to their site of localization, but cannot travel long distances to damage adjacent normal tissue such as bone marrow.
  • c. Specific activity (i.e. radioactivity per mass of the radionuclide)—Radionuclides that have high specific activity (e.g. generator produced 90-Y, 111-In, 177-Lu) are particularly preferred. The specific activity of a radionuclide is determined by its method of production, the particular target that is used to produce it, and the properties of the isotope in question.
  • 3. Linking Groups
  • The terms “linker,” and “linking group” are used synonymously herein to refer to any chemical group that serves to couple the targeting molecule to the metal chelator while not adversely affecting either the targeting function of the targeting molecule or the metal complexing function of the metal chelator. Linking groups may optionally be present in the stabilized radiopharmaceutical formulations of the invention.
  • Suitable linking groups include peptides (i.e., amino acids linked together) alone, a non-peptide group (e.g., hydrocarbon chain) or a combination of an amino acid sequence and a non-peptide spacer.
  • In one embodiment, the linking group includes L-glutamine and a hydrocarbon chain, or a combination thereof.
  • In another embodiment, the linking group includes a pure peptide linking group consisting of a series of amino acids (e.g., diglycine, triglycine, gly-gly-glu, gly-ser-gly, etc.), in which the total number of atoms between the N-terminal residue of the targeting molecule and the metal chelator in the polymeric chain is ≦12 atoms.
  • In yet a further embodiment, the linking group includs a hydrocarbon chain [i.e., R1—(CH2)n—R2] wherein n is 0-10, preferably n=3 to 9, R1 is a group (e.g., H2N—, HS—, —COOH) that can be used as a site for covalently linking the ligand backbone or the preformed metal chelator or metal complexing backbone; and R2 is a group that is used for covalent coupling to the targeting molecule (e.g., to the N-terminal NH2-group of a targeting peptide (e.g., R2 is an activated COOH group)). Several chemical methods for conjugating ligands (i.e., chelators) or preferred metal chelates to biomolecules have been well described in the literature [Wilbur, 1992; Parker, 1990; Hermanson, 1996; Frizberg et al., 1995]. One or more of these methods could be used to link either the uncomplexed ligand (chelator) or the radiometal chelate to the linker or to link the linker to the targeting molecule. These methods include the formation of acid anhydrides, aldehydes, arylisothiocyanates, activated esters, or N-hydroxysuccinimides [Wilbur, 1992; Parker, 1990; Hermanson, 1996; Frizberg et al., 1995].
  • 3A. Linking Groups Containing at Least One Non-Alpha Amino Acid
  • In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the linking group is of the formula N—O—P and contains at least one non-alpha amino acid. Thus, in this embodiment of the linker N—O—P,
      • N is 0 (where 0 means it is absent), an alpha or non-alpha amino acid or other linking group;
      • O is an alpha or non-alpha amino acid; and
      • P is 0, an alpha or non-alpha amino acid or other linking group,
      • wherein at least one of N, O or P is a non-alpha amino acid.
  • Thus, in one example, N=Gly, O=a non-alpha amino acid, and P=0.
  • Alpha amino acids are well known in the art, and include naturally occurring and synthetic amino acids. Non-alpha amino acids also include those which are naturally occurring or synthetic. Preferred non-alpha amino acids include:
    • 8-amino-3,6-dioxaoctanoic acid;
    • N-4-aminoethyl-N-1-acetic acid; and polyethylene glycol derivatives having the formula NH2—(CH2CH2O)n-CH2CO2H or NH2—(CH2CH2O)n-CH2CH2CO2H where n=2 to 100.
    3B. Linking Groups Containing at Least One Substituted Bile Acid
  • In another embodiment of the present invention, the linker is of the formula N—O—P and contains at least one substituted bile acid. Thus, in this embodiment of the linker N—O—P,
      • N is 0 (where 0 means it is absent), an alpha amino acid, a substituted bile acid or other linking group;
      • O is an alpha amino acid or a substituted bile acid; and
      • P is 0, an alpha amino acid, a substituted bile acid or other linking group,
      • wherein at least one of N, O or P is a substituted acid.
  • Bile acids are found in bile (a secretion of the liver) and are steroids having a hydroxyl group and a five carbon atom side chain terminating in a carboxyl group. In substituted bile acids, at least one atom such as a hydrogen atom of the bile acid is substituted with another atom, molecule or chemical group. For example, substituted bile acids include those having a 3-amino, 24-carboxyl function optionally substituted at positions 7 and 12 with hydrogen, hydroxyl or keto functionality.
  • Other useful substituted bile acids in the present invention include substituted cholic acids and derivatives thereof. Specific substituted cholic acid derivatives include:
    • (3β,5β)-3-aminocholan-24-oic acid;
    • (3β,5β,12α)-3-amino-12-hydroxycholan-24-oic acid;
    • (3β,5β,7α,12α)-3-amino-7,12-dihydroxycholan-24-oic acid;
    • Lys-(3,6,9)-trioxaundecane-1,11-dicarbonyl-3,7-dideoxy-3-aminocholic acid);
    • (3β,5β,7α)-3-amino-7-hydroxy-12-oxocholan-24-oic acid; and
    • (3β,5β,7α)-3-amino-7-hydroxycholan-24-oic acid.
    3C. Linkers Containing at Least One Non-Alpha Amino Acid with a Cyclic Group
  • In yet another embodiment of the present invention, the linker N—O—P contains at least one non-alpha amino acid with a cyclic group. Thus, in this embodiment of the linker N—O—P,
      • N is 0 (where 0 means it is absent), an alpha amino acid, a non-alpha amino acid with a cyclic group or other linking group;
      • O is an alpha amino acid or a non-alpha amino acid with a cyclic group; and
      • P is 0, an alpha amino acid, a non-alpha amino acid with a cyclic group, or other linking group,
      • wherein at least one of N, O or P is a non-alpha amino acid with a cyclic group.
  • Non-alpha amino acids with a cyclic group include substituted phenyl, biphenyl, cyclohexyl or other amine and carboxyl containing cyclic aliphatic or heterocyclic moieties. Examples of such include:
    • 4-aminobenzoic acid
    • 4-aminomethyl benzoic acid
    • trans-4-aminomethylcyclohexane carboxylic acid
    • 4-(2-aminoethoxy)benzoic acid
    • isonipecotic acid
    • 2-aminomethylbenzoic acid
    • 4-amino-3-nitrobenzoic acid
    • 4-(3-carboxymethyl-2-keto-1-benzimidazolyl-piperidine
    • 6-(piperazin-1-yl)-4-(3H)-quinazolinone-3-acetic acid
    • (2S,5S)-5-amino-1,2,4,5,6,7-hexahydro-5-amino-1,2,4,5,6,7-hexahydro azepino[3,2,1-hi]indole-4-one-2-carboxylic acid
    • (4S,7R)-4-amino-6-aza-5-oxo-9-thiabicyclo[4.3.0]nonane-7-carboxylic acid
    • 3-carboxymethyl-1-phenyl-1,3,8-triazaspiro[4.5]decan-4-one
    • N1-piperazineacetic acid
    • N-4-aminoethyl-N-1-piperazineacetic acid
    • (3S)-3-amino-1-carboxymethylcaprolactam
    • (2S,6S,9)-6-amino-2-carboxymethyl-3,8-diazabicyclo-[4,3,0]-nonane-1,4-dione
    4. Targeting Molecule
  • Any molecule that specifically binds to or reactively associates or complexes with a receptor or other receptive moiety associated with a given target cell population may be used as a targeting molecule in radiopharmaceutical formulations of the invention. This cell reactive molecule, to which the metal chelator is linked optionally via a linking group, may be any molecule that binds to, complexes with or reacts with the cell population sought to be bound or localized to. The cell reactive molecule acts to deliver the radiopharmaceutical to the particular target cell population with which the molecule reacts.
  • The targeting molecule may be non-peptidic such as, for example, steroids, carbohydrates, or small non-peptidic molecules. The targeting molecule may also be an antibody, such as, for example, a monoclonal or polyclonal antibody, a fragment thereof, or a protein, including, for example, derivatives of Annexin, anti-CEA, Tositumomab, HUA33, Epratuzumab, cG250, human serum albumin, lbritumomab Tiuxetan and the like. Preferably the targeting molecule is a peptide, peptide mimetic or peptoid. Most preferably the targeting molecule is a peptide (a “targeting peptide”).
  • In preferred embodiments, the targeting molecule used in a radiopharmaceutical formulation of the invention is a biologically active peptide.
  • In a more preferred embodiment, the targeting molecule is a peptide that binds to a receptor or enzyme of interest. For example, the targeting molecule may be a peptide hormone such as, for example, luteinizing hormone releasing hormone (LHRH) such as that described in the literature (e.g., Radiometal-Binding Analogues of Luteinizing Hormone Releasing Hormone PCT/US96/08695; PCT/US97/12084 (WO 98/02192)); insulin; oxytocin; somatostatin; Neuro kinin-1 (NK-1); Vasoactive Intestinal Peptide (VIP) including both linear and cyclic versions as delineated in the literature, [e.g., Comparison of Cyclic and Linear Analogs of Vasoactive Intestinal Peptide. D. R. Bolin, J. M. Cottrell, R. Garippa, N. Rinaldi, R. Senda, B. Simkio, M. O'Donnell. Peptides: Chemistry, Structure and Biology Pravin T. P. Kaumaya, and Roberts S. Hodges (Eds). Mayflower Scientific LTD., 1996, pgs 174-175]; gastrin releasing peptide (GRP); bombesin and other known hormone peptides, as well as analogues and derivatives thereof.
  • Other useful targeting molecules include analogues of somatostatin which, for example, are Lanreotide (Nal-Cys-Thr-DTrp-Lys-Val-Cys-Thr-NH2), Octreotide (Nal-Cys-Thr-DTrp-Lys-Val-Cys-Thr-ol), and Maltose-(Phe-Cys-Thr-DTrp-Lys-Val-Cys-Thr-ol). These analogues are described in the literature [e.g., Potent Somatostatin Analogs Containing N-terminal Modifications, S. H. Kim, J. Z. Dong, T. D. Gordon, H. L. Kimball, S. C. Moreau, J.-P. Moreau, B. A. Morgan, W. A. Murphy and J. E. Taylor; Peptides: Chemistry, Structure and Biology Pravin T. P. Kaumaya, and Roberts S. Hodges (Eds)., Mayflower Scientific LTD., 1996, pgs 241-243.]
  • Still other useful targeting molecules include Substance P agonists [e.g., G. Bitan, G. Byk, Y. Mahriki, M. Hanani, D. Halle, Z. Selinger, C. Gilon, Peptides: Chemistry, Structure and Biology, Pravin T. P. Kaumaya, and Roberts S. Hodges (Eds), Mayflower Scientific LTD., 1996, pgs 697-698; G Protein Antagonists A novel hydrophobic peptide competes with receptor for G protein binding, Hidehito Mukai, Eisuke Munekata, Tsutomu Higashijima, J. Biol. Chem. 1992, 267, 16237-16243]; NPY(Y1) [e.g., Novel Analogues of Neuropeptide Y with a Preference for the yl-receptor, Richard M. Soll, Michaela, C. Dinger, Ingrid Lundell, Dan Larhammer, Annette G. Beck-Sickinger, Eur. J. Biochem. 2001, 268, 2828-2837; 99mTc-Labeled Neuropeptide Y Analogues as Potential Tumor Imaging Agents, Michael Langer, Roberto La Bella, Elisa Garcia-Garayoa, Annette G. Beck-Sickinger, Bioconjugate Chem. 2001, 12, 1028-1034; Novel Peptide Conjugates for Tumor-Specific Chemotherapy, Michael Langer, Felix Kratz, Barbara Rothen-Rutishauser, Heidi Wnderli-Allenspach, Annette G. Beck-Sickinger, J. Med. Chem. 2001, 44, 1341-1348]; oxytocin; endothelin A and endothelin B; bradykinin; Epidermal Growth Factor (EGF); Interleukin-1 [Anti-IL-1 Activity of Peptide Fragments of IL-1 Family Proteins, I. Z. Siemion, A. Kluczyk, Zbigtniew Wieczorek, Peptides 1998, 19, 373-382]; and cholecystokinin (CCK-B) [Cholecystokinin Receptor Imaging Using an Octapeptide DTPA-CCK Analogue in Patients with Medullary Thyroid Carcinoma, Eur. J. Nucl Med. 200, 27, 1312-1317]. Other useful as targeting molecules include: transferrin, platelet-derived growth factor, tumor growth factors (“TGF”), such as TGF-a and TGF-β, vaccinia growth factor (“VGF”), insulin-like growth factors I and II, urotensin II peptides and analogs, depreotide, vapreotide, insulinlike growth factor (IGF), peptides targeting receptors which are upregulated in angiogenesis such as VEGF receptors (e.g., KDR, NP-1, etc.), RGD-containing peptides, melanocyte-stimulating hormone (MSH) peptide, neurotensin, calcitonin, peptides from complementarity determining regions of an antitumor antibody, glutathione, YIGSR (leukocyte-avid peptides, e.g., P483H, which contains the heparin-binding region of platelet factor-4 (PF-4) and a lysine-rich sequence), atrial natriuretic peptide (ANP), β-amyloid peptides, delta-opioid antagonists (such as ITIPP(psi)), annexin-V, IL-1/IL-1ra, IL-2, IL-6, IL-8, leukotriene B4 (LTB4), chemotactic peptides (such as N-formyl-methionyl-leucyl-phenylalanine-lysine (fMLFK)), GP IIb/IIIa receptor antagonists (such as DMP444), epidermal growth factor, human neutrophil elastase inhibitor (EPI-HNE-2, HNE2, and HNE4), plasmin inhibitor, antimicrobial peptides, apticide (P280), P274, thrombospondin receptor (including analogs such as TP-1300), bitistatin, pituitary adenyl cyclase type I receptor (PAC1), and analogues and derivatives of these.
  • A general review of targeting molecules, can be found, for example, in the following: The Role of Peptides and Their Receptors as Tumor Markers, Jean-Claude Reubi, Gastrointestinal Hormones in Medicine, pg. 899-939; Peptide Radiopharmaceuticals in Nuclear Medicine, D. Blok, R. I. J. Feitsma, P. Vermeij, E. J. K. Pauwels, Eur. J. Nucl Med. 1999, 26, 1511-1519; and Radiolabeled Peptides and Other Ligands for Receptors Overexpressed in Tumor Cells for Imaging Neoplasms, John G. McAfee, Ronald D. Neumann, Nuclear Medicine and Biology, 1996, 23, 673-676 (somatostatin, VIP, CCK, GRP, Substance P, Galanin, MSH, LHRH, Arginine-vasopressin, endothelin). All of the aforementioned literature in the preceding paragraphs are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • Other targeting molecule references include the following: Co-expressed peptide receptors in breast cancer as a molecular basis of in vivo multireceptor tumour targeting. Jean Claude Reubi, Mathias Gugger, Beatrice Waser. Eur. J. Nucl Med. 2002, 29, 855-862, (includes NPY, GRP); Radiometal-Binding Analogues of Leutenizing Hormone Releasing Hormone PCT/US96/08695 (LHRH); PCT/US97/12084 (WO 98/02192) (LHRH); PCT/EP90/01169 (radiotherapy of peptides); WO 91/01144 (radiotherapy of peptides); and PCT/EP00/01553 (molecules for the treatment and diagnosis of tumours), all of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • Additionally, analogues of a targeting molecule can be used. These analogues include molecules that target a desired site receptor with avidity that is greater than or equal to the targeting molecule itself. For targeting peptides analogues include muteins, retropeptides and retro-inverso-peptides of the targeting peptide. One of ordinary skill will appreciate that these analogues may also contain modifications which include substitutions, and/or deletions and/or additions of one or several amino acids, insofar that these modifications do not negatively alter the biological activity of the targeting molecules. Substitutions in targeting peptides may be carried out by replacing one or more amino acids by their synonymous amino acids. Synonymous amino acids within a group are defined as amino acids that have sufficient physicochemical properties to allow substitution between members of a group in order to preserve the biological function of the molecule. Synonymous amino acids as used herein include synthetic derivatives of these amino acids (such as for example the D-forms of amino acids and other synthetic derivatives), and, the D-forms of amino acids and other synthetic derivatives). Throughout this application amino acids are abbreviated interchangeably either by their three letter or single letter abbreviations, which are well known to the skilled artisan. Thus, for example, T or Thr stands for threonine, K or Lys stands for lysine, P or Pro stands for proline and R or Arg stands for arginine.
  • Deletions or insertions of amino acids may also be introduced into the defined sequences of targeting peptides provided they do not alter the biological functions of said sequences. Preferentially such insertions or deletions should be limited to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 amino acids and should not remove or physically disturb or displace amino acids which are critical to the functional conformation. Muteins of targeting peptides or polypeptides may have a sequence homologous to the original targeting peptide sequence in which amino acid substitutions, deletions, or insertions are present at one or more amino acid positions. Muteins may have a biological activity that is at least 40%, preferably at least 50%, more preferably 60-70%, most preferably 80-90% of the original targeting peptide. However, they may also have a biological activity greater than the original targeting peptide, and thus do not necessarily have to be identical to the biological function of the original targeting peptides. Analogues of targeting peptides also include peptidomimetics or pseudopeptides incorporating changes to the amide bonds of the peptide backbone, including thioamides, methylene amines, and E-olefins. Also molecules based on the structure of a targeting peptide or its analogues with amino acids replaced by N-substituted hydrazine carbonyl compounds (also known as aza amino acids) are included in the term analogues as used herein.
  • Where a targeting peptide is used, it may be attached to a linker via the N or C terminus or via attachment to the epsilon nitrogen of lysine, the gamma nitrogen or ornithine or the second carboxyl group of aspartic or glutamic acid.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the targeting molecule is a gastrin releasing peptide (GRP) receptor targeting molecule. A GRP receptor-targeting molecule is a molecule that specifically binds to or reactively associates or complexes with one or more members of the GRP receptor family. In other words, it is a molecule which has a binding affinity for the GRP receptor family. In an especially preferred embodiment, the targeting molecule is a GRP receptor targeting peptide (e.g., a peptide, equivalent, analogue or derivative thereof with a binding affinity for one or more members of the GRP receptor family).
  • The GRP receptor targeting molecule may take the form of an agonist or an antagonist. A GRP receptor targeting molecule agonist is known to “activate” the cell following binding with high affinity and may be internalized by the cell. Conversely, GRP receptor targeting molecule antagonists are known to bind only to the GRP receptor on the cell without stimulating internalization by the cell and without “activating” the cell. In a preferred embodiment, the GRP receptor targeting molecule is an agonist and more preferably it is a peptide agonist.
  • In a more preferred embodiment of the present invention, the GRP agonist is a bombesin (BBN) analogue and/or a derivative thereof. The BBN derivative or analog thereof preferably contains either the same primary structure of the BBN binding region (i.e., BBN(7-14) [SEQ ID NO:1]) or similar primary structures, with specific amino acid substitutions that will specifically bind to GRP receptors with better or similar binding affinities as BBN alone (i.e., Kd<25 nM). Suitable compounds include peptides, peptidomimetics and analogues and derivatives thereof. The presence of L-methionine (Met) at position BBN-14 will generally confer agonistic properties while the absence of this residue at BBN-14 generally confers antagonistic properties [Hoffken, 1994].
  • It is well documented in the art that there are a few and selective number of specific amino acid substitutions in the BBN (8-14) binding region (e.g., D-Ala11 for L-Gly11 or D-Trp8 for L-Trp8), which can be made without decreasing binding affinity [Leban et al., 1994; Qin et al., 1994; Jensen et al., 1993]. In addition, attachment of some amino acid chains or other groups to the N-terminal amine group at position BBN-8 (i.e., the Trp8 residue) can dramatically decrease the binding affinity of BBN analogues to GRP receptors [Davis et al., 1992; Hoffken, 1994; Moody et al., 1996; Coy, et al., 1988; Cai et al., 1994]. In a few cases, it is possible to append additional amino acids or chemical moieties without decreasing binding affinity.
  • Analogues of BBN receptor targeting molecules include molecules that target the GRP receptors with avidity that is greater than or equal to BBN, as well as muteins, retropeptides and retro-inverso-peptides of GRP or BBN. One of ordinary skill will appreciate that these analogues may also contain modifications which include substitutions, and/or deletions and/or additions of one or several amino acids, insofar that these modifications do not negatively alter the biological activity of the peptides described therein. These substitutions may be carried out by replacing one or more amino acids by their synonymous amino acids.
  • The stabilizers of the present invention may also be used for compounds that do not have a distinct targeting or linking group, and wherein the metal/chelator combination alone provides targeting to the desired organ or organ system. For example, the stabilizers described here have potential utility in the stabilization of compounds such as 166Ho-DOTMP, 188Re-HEDTMP, 153Sm-EDTMP, 99mTc-MDP and the like, all of which target bone.
  • 5. Labeling and Administration of Compounds
  • Incorporation of the radioisotope within the stabilized conjugates of this invention can be achieved by various methods commonly known in the art of coordination chemistry. Where incorporation of, for example, 111In or 177Lu is desired, the methods set forth in the Examples may be used. When the metal is 99mTc, a preferred radionuclide for diagnostic imaging, the following general procedure can be used to form a technetium complex. A peptide-chelator conjugate solution is formed by initially dissolving the conjugate in an aqueous solution of dilute acid, base, salt or buffer, or in an aqueous solution of an alcohol such as ethanol. The solution is then optionally degassed to remove dissolved oxygen. When an —SH group is present in the peptide, a thiol protecting group such as Acm (acetamidomethyl), trityl or other thiol protecting group may optionally be used to protect the thiol from oxidation. The thiol protecting group(s) are removed with a suitable reagent, for example with sodium hydroxide, and are then neutralized with an organic acid such as acetic acid. Alternatively, the thiol protecting group can be removed in situ during technetium chelation. In the labeling step, sodium pertechnetate obtained from a molybdenum generator is added to a solution of the conjugate with a sufficient amount of a reducing agent, such as stannous chloride, to reduce technetium and is either allowed to stand at room temperature or is heated. The labeled conjugate can be separated from the contaminants 99mTcO4 and colloidal 99mTcO2 chromatographically, for example with a C-18 Sep Pak cartridge [Millipore Corporation] or by HPLC using methods known to those skilled in the art.
  • In an alternative method, the labeling can be accomplished by a transchelation reaction. In this method, the technetium source is a solution of technetium that is reduced and complexed with labile ligands prior to reaction with the selected chelator, thus facilitating ligand exchange with the selected chelator. Examples of suitable ligands for transchelation includes tartrate, citrate, gluconate, and heptagluconate. It will be appreciated that the conjugate can be labeled using the techniques described above, or alternatively, the chelator itself may be labeled and subsequently coupled to the peptide to form the conjugate; a process referred to as the “prelabeled chelate” method. Re and Tc are both in row VIIB of the Periodic Table and they are chemical congeners. Thus, for the most part, the complexation chemistry of these two metals with ligand frameworks that exhibit high in vitro and in vivo stabilities are the same [Eckelman, 1995] and similar chelators and procedures can be used to label with Re. Many 99mTc or 186/188Re complexes, which are employed to form stable radiometal complexes with peptides and proteins, chelate these metals in their +5 oxidation state [Lister-James et al., 1997]. This oxidation state makes it possible to selectively place 99mTc- or 186/188Re into ligand frameworks already conjugated to the biomolecule, constructed from a variety of 99mTc(V) and/or 186/188Re(V) weak chelates (e.g., 99mTc-glucoheptonate, citrate, gluconate, etc.) [Eckelman, 1995; Lister-James et al., 1997; Pollak et al., 1996].
  • 6. Diagnostic and Therapeutic Uses
  • The stabilized radiopharmaceuticals and radiopharmaceutical formulations of the present invention can be used to image or deliver radiotherapy to selected tissues. In a preferred embodiment, they may be used to treat and/or detect cancers, including tumors, by procedures established in the art of radiodiagnostics and radiotherapeutics. [Bushbaum, 1995; Fischman et al., 1993; Schubiger et al., 1996; Lowbertz et al., 1994; Krenning et al., 1994].
  • Indeed the stabilized radiopharmaceutical formulations of the examples are able to target GRP receptor expressing tissues, including tumors and thus to image or deliver radiotherapy to these tissues. As GRP receptors are well documented to be over-expressed in a number of cancer types such as prostate, breast and small cell lung cancer, a radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic agent that targets such receptors has the potential to be widely useful for the diagnosis or treatment of such cancers. The diagnostic application of the stabilized radiopharmaceuticals of the invention can be as a first line diagnostic screen for the presence of a disease state such as, for example, neoplastic cells using scintigraphic imaging, as an agent for targeting particular tissues (e.g., neoplastic tissue) using hand-held radiation detection instrumentation in the field of radio guided surgery (RIGS), as a means to obtain dosimetry data prior to administration of the matched pair radiotherapeutic compound, and as a means to assess, for example, receptor population as a function of treatment over time.
  • The therapeutic application of the stabilized radiopharmaceuticals of the invention can be as an agent that will be used as a monotherapy in the treatment of a disease, such as cancer, as combination therapy where these radiolabeled agents could be utilized in conjunction with adjuvant chemotherapy, and as the matched pair therapeutic agent. The matched pair concept refers to a single unlabeled compound which can serve as both a diagnostic and a therapeutic agent depending on the radioisotope that has been selected for binding to the appropriate chelate. If the chelator cannot accommodate the desired metals appropriate substitutions can be made to accommodate the different metal whilst maintaining the pharmacology such that the behaviour of the diagnostic compound in vivo can be used to predict the behaviour of the radiotherapeutic compound.
  • The stabilized compounds and formulations of the present invention can be administered to a patient alone or as part of a composition that contains other components such as excipients, diluents, and carriers, all of which are well-known in the art. The compounds can be administered to patients intravenously, subcutaneously, intra-arterially, intraperitoneally, intratumorally or by installation into resection cavities in, e.g., the brain. Stabilized radiolabeled scintigraphic imaging agents provided by the present invention are provided having a suitable amount of radioactivity. In forming 99mTc radioactive complexes, it is generally preferred to form radioactive complexes in solutions containing radioactivity at concentrations of from about 0.01 millicurie (mCi) to 100 mCi per mL. Generally, the unit dose to be administered has a radioactivity of about 0.01 mCi to about 100 mCi, preferably 1 mCi to 30 mCi. The solution to be injected at unit dosage is from about 0.01 mL to about 10 mL. For 111In-labeled complexes, the unit dose to be administered typically ranges from about 0.01 mCi to about 10 mCi, preferably 3 to 6 mCi for diagnostic applications, and from 10 mCi to about 2 Curies for radiotherapeutic applications, preferably 30 mCi to 800 mCi. For 177Lu-labeled complexes, the unit dose to be administered typically ranges from about 10 mCi to about 200 mCi, preferably from about 100 to about 200 mCi. The amount of labeled conjugate appropriate for administration is dependent upon the distribution profile of the chosen conjugate in the sense that a rapidly cleared conjugate may need to be administered in higher doses than one that clears less rapidly. In vivo distribution and localization can be tracked by standard scintigraphic techniques at an appropriate time subsequent to administration; typically between thirty minutes and 180 minutes depending upon the rate of accumulation at the target site with respect to the rate of clearance at non-target tissue. For example, after injection of the stabilized diagnostic radionuclide-labeled compounds of the invention into the patient, a gamma camera calibrated for the gamma ray energy of the nuclide incorporated in the imaging agent can be used to image areas of uptake of the agent and quantify the amount of radioactivity present in the site. Imaging of the site in vivo can take place in a few minutes. However, imaging can take place, if desired, hours or days after the radiolabeled compound is injected into a patient. In most instances, a sufficient amount of the administered dose will accumulate in the area to be imaged within about 0.1 hour to permit the taking of scintiphotos. With radiolabeled antibodies and antibody fragments, appropriate imaging times may be up to about one week following administration.
  • There are numerous advantages associated with the present invention. The compounds made in accordance with the present invention form stable, well-defined 111In or 177Lu labeled compounds. Similar stabilized compounds and formulations of the invention can also be made by using appropriate chelator frameworks for the respective radiometals, to form stable, well-defined products labeled with 153Sm, 90Y, 166Ho, 105Rh, 199Au, 149Pm, 99mTc, 186/188Re or other radiometal. The stabilized radiolabeled GRP receptor targeting peptides selectively bind to neoplastic cells expressing GRP receptors, and if an agonist is used, become internalized, and are retained in the tumor cells for extended time periods. Because of the high radiostability obtained, the radioactive formulations do not undergo significant decompositon, and thus can be prepared at, for example, a central radiolabeling facility and then shipped to distant sites without significant decomposition and loss of targeting ability.
  • 7. Radiotherapy
  • Radioisotope therapy involves the administration of a radiolabeled compound in sufficient quantity to damage or destroy the targeted tissue. After administration of the compound (by e.g., intravenous, subcutaneous, or intraperitonal injection), the stabilized radiolabeled pharmaceutical localizes preferentially at the disease site (e.g., tumor tissue that expresses a member of the GRP receptor family). Once localized, the radiolabeled compound then damages or destroys the diseased tissue with the energy that is released during the radioactive decay of the isotope that is administered.
  • The design of a successful radiotherapeutic involves several critical factors:
  • 1. selection of an appropriate targeting group to deliver the radioactivity to the disease site;
  • 2. selection of an appropriate radionuclide that releases sufficient energy to damage that disease site, without substantially damaging adjacent normal tissues; and
  • 3. selection of an appropriate combination of the targeting group and the radionuclide without adversely affecting the ability of this conjugate to localize at the disease site. For radiometals, this often involves a chelating group that coordinates tightly to the radionuclide, combined with a linker that couples said chelate to the targeting group, and that affects the overall biodistribution of the compound to maximize uptake in target tissues and minimize uptake in normal, non-target organs.
  • 4. Selection of appropriate radiostabilizers such that once formed, the radiotherapeutic compound does not undergo significant radiolytic decomposition prior to administration.
  • The present invention provides stabilized radiotherapeutic agents that satisfy all of the above criteria, through proper selection of stabilizer or stabilizers, targeting group, radionuclide, metal chelate [if present] and optional linker.
  • For radiotherapy applications any of the chelators for therapeutic radionuclides disclosed herein may be used. However, forms of the DOTA chelate [Tweedle M F, Gaughan G T, Hagan J T, “1-Substituted-1,4,7-triscarboxymethyl-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane and analogs.” U.S. Pat. No. 4,885,363, Dec. 5, 1989] are particularly preferred, as the DOTA chelate is expected to lose the bound radionuclide less in the body than DTPA or other linear chelates.
  • General methods for coupling DOTA-type macrocycles to targeting groups through a linker (e.g. by activation of one of the carboxylates of the DOTA to form an active ester, which is then reacted with an amino group on the linker to form a stable amide bond), are known to those skilled in the art. (See, e.g., Tweedle et al. U.S. Pat. No. 4,885,363; Current and potential therapeutic uses of lanthanide radioisotopes, Cutler, C, et al., Cancer Biotherapy & Radiopharmaceuticals (2000), 15(6), 531-545; Receptor targeting for tumor localisation and therapy with radiopeptides, Heppeler, A et al., Current Medicinal Chemistry (2000), 7(9), 971-994; Preparation methods for bifunctional chelatones for conjugation with antibodies, Budsky, F et al., Radioisotopy (1990), 31(4), 70-80)). Coupling can also be performed on DOTA-type macrocycles that are modified on the backbone of the polyaza ring.
  • The selection and amount of the proper stabilizer or stabilizer combination used to stabilize the radionuclide selected will also depend on the properties of the isotope selected, as, in general, nuclides that emit high energy alpha or beta radiation will have a requirement for more radiostabilizer than those that emit low energy radiation.
  • Many of the lanthanides and lanthanoids include radioisotopes that have nuclear properties that make them suitable for use as radiotherapeutic agents, as they emit beta particles. Some of these are listed in the table below.
  • Approximate
    range of b-
    particle
    Half-Life Max b-energy Gamma energy (cell
    Isotope (days) (MeV) (keV) diameters)
    149-Pm 2.21 1.1 286 60
    153-Sm 1.93 0.69 103 30
    166-Dy 3.40 0.40 82.5 15
    166-Ho 1.12 1.8 80.6 117
    175-Yb 4.19 0.47 396 17
    177-Lu 6.71 0.50 208 20
    90-Y 2.67 2.28 150
    111-In 2.810 Auger electron 173, 247 <5 μm
    emitter
    Pm: Promethium,
    Sm: Samarium,
    Dy: Dysprosium,
    Ho: Holmium,
    Yb: Ytterbium,
    Lu: Lutetium,
    Y: Yttrium,
    In: Indium
  • Methods for the preparation of radiometals such as beta-emitting lanthanide radioisotopes are known to those skilled in the art, and have been described elsewhere [e.g., Cutler C S, Smith C J, Ehrhardt G J.; Tyler T T, Jurisson S S, Deutsch E. “Current and potential therapeutic uses of lanthanide radioisotopes.” Cancer Biother. Radiopharm. 2000; 15(6): 531-545]. Many of these isotopes can be produced in high yield for relatively low cost, and many (e.g., 90Y, 149Pm, 177Lu) can be produced at close to carrier-free specific activities (i.e., the vast majority of atoms are radioactive). Since non-radioactive atoms can compete with their radioactive analogs for binding to receptors on the target tissue, it is advantageous that isotopes that are essentially isotopically pure (i.e., free of their nonradioactive congeners) be used, to allow delivery of as high a dose of radioactivity to the target tissue as possible.
  • Stabilized radiotherapeutic derivatives of the invention containing beta-emitting isotopes of lutetium and yttrium (177Lu and 90Y) are particularly preferred.
  • 8. Dosages and Additives
  • Proper dose schedules for the stabilized radiopharmaceutical compounds of the present invention are known to those skilled in the art. The stabilized compounds can be administered using many methods which include, but are not limited to, a single or multiple IV or IP injections, using a quantity of radioactivity that is sufficient to permit imaging or, in the case of radiotherapy, to cause damage or ablation of the targeted tissue, but not so much that substantive damage is caused to non-target (normal tissue). The quantity and dose required for scintigraphic imaging is discussed supra. The quantity and dose required for radiotherapy is also different for different constructs, depending on the energy and half-life of the isotope used, the degree of uptake and clearance of the agent from the body and the mass of the tumor. In general, doses can range from a single dose of about 30-200 mCi to a cumulative dose of up to about 3 Curies.
  • In addition to the stabilizers described in this application, the radiopharmaceutical compositions of the invention can include physiologically acceptable buffers, non-aqueous solvents, bulking agents and other lyophilization aids or solubilizing agents. They can be either in a liquid formulation [either frozen or at room temperature, or can be lyophilized (freeze dried).
  • A single, or multi-vial kit that contains all of the components needed to prepare the stabilized radiopharmaceuticals of this invention, other than the radionuclide, is an integral part of this invention.
  • In a preferred embodiment, a single-vial kit for the preparation of stabilized compounds preferably contains a chelator/optional linker/targeting peptide molecule, an optional source of stannous salt or other pharmaceutically acceptable reducing agent (if reduction is required, e.g., when using technetium or rhenium), and is appropriately buffered with pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base to adjust the pH to a value of about 3 to about 9. The quantity and type of reducing agent used will depend highly on the nature of the exchange complex to be formed. The proper conditions are well known to those that are skilled in the art. In one embodiment, the kit contents are in lyophilized form. Depending on the radioisotope used, such a single vial kit may optionally contain labile or exchange ligands such as acetate, glucoheptonate, gluconate, mannitol, malate, citric or tartaric acid and can also contain reaction modifiers such as diethylenetriamine-pentaacetic acid (DPTA), ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), or α, β, or γ-cyclodextrins and derivatives that serve to improve the radiochemical purity and stability of the final product. The kit may also contain bulking agents such as mannitol that are designed to aid in the freeze-drying process, and other additives known to those skilled in the art. The stabilizer or stabilizer combination selected should contain sufficient stabilizer to prevent significant decomposition of the product over the useful shelf-life of the reconstituted product.
  • A multi-vial kit preferably contains the same general components but employs more than one vial in reconstituting the radiopharmaceutical. For example, one vial may contain all of the ingredients that are required to form a labile Tc(V) or Re(V) complex on addition of pertechnetate (e.g., the stannous source or other reducing agent). Pertechnetate is added to this vial, and after waiting an appropriate period of time, the contents of this vial are added to a second vial that contains the chelator and targeting peptide, as well as buffers appropriate to adjust the pH to its optimal value and stabilizers sufficient to prevent radiolytic damage. After a reaction time of about 5 to 60 minutes, the complexes of the present invention are formed. It is advantageous that the contents of both vials of this multi-vial kit be lyophilized. As above, reaction modifiers, exchange ligands, stabilizers, bulking agents, etc. may be present in either or both vials.
  • 9. Radiostabilizers
  • The presence of one or more radiostabilizers described herein is a requirement in stabilized formulations of the invention. The purpose of these stabilizers is to slow or prevent radiolytic damage to both the unlabeled and radiolabeled radiopharmaceuticals. Although some radiostabilizers are known, none of the literature has revealed the need for radiostabilizers for radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic GRP-receptor binding compounds. However, it has been found that stabilizers are required, especially as the amount of radioactivity in the formulation is increased, and when beta-emitting radiotherapeutic isotopes are used. As described by the examples below, many stabilizers have been identified that, alone or in combination, inhibit radiolytic damage to radiolabeled compounds. At this time, four approaches are the most preferred solutions to the problem.
  • In the first approach, a radiolysis stabilizing solution containing a mixture of the following ingredients is added to the radiolabeled compound immediately following the radiolabeling reaction: gentisic acid, ascorbic acid, human serum albumin, benzyl alcohol, a physiologically acceptable buffer or salt solution at a pH of about 4.5 to about 8.5, and in a preferred embodiment, one or more amino acids selected from methionine, selenomethionine, selenocysteine, or cysteine.
  • The physiologically acceptable buffer or salt solution is preferably selected from phosphate, citrate, or acetate buffers or physiologically acceptable sodium chloride solutions or a mixture thereof, at a molarity of from about 0.02M to about 0.2M.
  • In a preferred embodiment, the following concentrations are used: gentisic acid (2-20 mg/mL, most preferably about 10 mg/mL), ascorbic acid (10 to 100 mg/mL, most preferably about 50 mg/mL), human serum albumin (0.1 to 0.5%, most preferably about 0.2% (w/v)), benzyl alcohol (20 to 100 μL/mL, most preferably about 90 μL/mL), pH 4.5 to 8.0, most preferably about pH 5.0 citrate buffer (0.05 molar), and D- or L-methionine, L-selenomethionine, or L-cysteine (2 mg/mL).
  • Physiologically acceptable salts of the reagents may also be used (e.g. sodium ascorbate or sodium gentistate). D-, L-, and DL-forms of the amino acids may be used. Indeed, reference to a particular amino acid herein is intended to encompass use of the D-, L- and DL-forms of that amino acid.
  • The reagent benzyl alcohol is a key component in this formulation and serves two purposes. For compounds that have limited solubility, one of its purposes is to solubilize the radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic targeted compound in the reaction solution, without the need for added organic solvents. Its second purpose is to provide a bacteriostatic effect. This is important, as solutions that contain the radiostabilizers of the invention are expected to have long post-reconstitution stability, so the presence of a bacteriostat is desirable in order to maintain sterility. In a preferred embodiment, the amino acids methionine, selenomethionine, cysteine, and selenocysteine are also key components in this formulation and play a special role in preventing radiolytic damage to methionyl residues in targeted molecules that are stabilized with this radiostabilizing combination.
  • In the second approach, stabilization is achieved via the use of dithiocarbamate compounds having the following general formula:
  • Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00005
  • wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H; C1-C8 alkyl; —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl; or benzyl (Bn) (either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups),
    or wherein R1R2N combined are 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl- and M may be H+, Na+, K+, NH4 +, N-methylglucamine or other pharmaceutically acceptable +1 ion. Alternatively, compounds of the form shown below may be used, wherein M is a physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state, such as Mg2+ or Ca2+, and R1 and R2 have the same definition as described above.
  • Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00006
  • These reagents can either be added directly into reaction mixtures during radiolabeled complex preparation, or added after complexation is complete, or both.
  • The compound 1-Pyrrolidine Dithiocarbamic Acid Ammonium salt (PDTC) proved most efficacious as a stabilizer, when either added directly to the reaction mixture or added after complex formation. Use of this compound as a single reagent was effective at radioprotection of 177Lu-A and 177Lu-B (unlike in many of the studies above, where a combination of reagents had to be used). These results were unexpected, as the compound has not been reported for use as a stabilizer for radiopharmaceuticals prior to these studies. As shown in Example 20, dithiocarbamates such as PDTC provide the additional benefit of preventing contaminating metals from interfering with the labeling reaction.
  • In the third approach, formulations contain stabilizers that are water soluble organic selenium compounds wherein the selenium is in the oxidation state +2. Especially preferred are the amino acid compounds selenomethionine, and selenocysteine and their esters and amide derivatives and dipeptides and tri peptides thereof, which can either be added directly to the reaction mixture prior to or during radiolabeled complex preparation, or following complex preparation. The flexibility of having these stabilizers in the vial at the time of labeling or in a separate vial extends the utility of this invention for manufacturing radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic kits.
  • With these selenium compounds, it is highly efficacious to use these reagents in combination with sodium ascorbate or other pharmaceutically acceptable forms of ascorbic acid and its derivatives. The ascorbate is most preferably added after complexation is complete. Example 22 describes radiostabilization with this combination of reagents. Alternatively, it can be used as a component of the stabilizing formulation described above. If the selenium compound is an amino acid derivative such as selenomethionine or selenocysteine, then D-, L- and DL isomers of this amino acid derivative may be used.
  • A fourth approach involves the use of water soluble sulfur-containing compounds wherein the sulfur is in the +2 oxidation state. Preferred thiol compounds include derivatives of cysteine, mercaptothanol, and dithiolthreitol. These reagents are particularly preferred due to their ability to reduce oxidized forms of methionine residues (e.g., methionine oxide residues) back to methionyl residues, thus restoring oxidative damage that has occurred as a result of radiolysis. With these thiol compounds, it is highly efficacious to use these stabilizing reagents in combination with sodium ascorbate or other pharmaceutically acceptable forms of ascorbic acid and its derivatives. The ascorbate is most preferably added after complexation is complete. If the thiol compound is an amino acid derivative such as cysteine or cysteine ethyl ester, then D-, L- and DL isomers of this amino acid derivative may be used.
  • In the examples below, the use of stabilizing formulations containing examples of the four classes of reagents above are described. It should be understood that the four classes of agents can be used separately or in combination, as required to provide adequate radiostability to the radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic compound that is being stabilized. Although the examples provided focus primarily on the stabilization of compounds containing methionine which target the GRP receptor family, it is envisioned that this invention is much broader in scope. These methods of oxidative stabilization may be used to protect other radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutics derived from, e.g., peptides, monoclonal antibodies, monoclonal antibody fragments, aptamers, oligonucleotides and small molecules, from oxidative degradation (not necessarily just methionine oxidation).
  • Potential stabilizers were evaluated for their ability to prevent or slow the decomposition of 177Lu complexes of Compound A, referred to as 177Lu-A, and 177Lu complexes of Compound B, referred to as 177Lu-B, their Indium-labeled analogs 111In-A and 111In-B, and other compounds in this class. Potential scavengers were evaluated in different ways: by either adding them directly to the reaction mixture used to form the 177Lu or 111In complexes, or by adding the stabilizer(s) after the radiometal complex was formed (or both). Several efficacious stabilizers and stabilizer combinations have been identified.
  • TABLE 1
    Compounds tested as stabilizers and their structures
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00007
    Sodium L-ascorbate (Ascorbic acid)
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00008
    2,5-Dihydroxybenzoic acid sodium salt hydrate (Gentisic acid)
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00009
    L-Selenomethionine
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00010
    D-Methionine (L and DL also used)
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00011
    1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00012
    Dimethyldithiocarbamate sodium salt
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00013
    Diethyldithiocarbamate sodium salt
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00014
    2-Hydroxybenzothiazole
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00015
    Trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt nonahydrate
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00016
    2-Hydroxybenzothiazole
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00017
    2,1,3-Benzothiadiazole
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00018
    5-Thio-D-glucose
    H2NCH2CH2SSCH2CH2NH2 +2HCl Cystamine dihydrochloride
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00019
    L-cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00020
    L-cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00021
    L-cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00022
    L-cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00023
    L-cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00024
    L-cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00025
    Thiamine hydrochloride
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00026
    L-Glutathione, reduced
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00027
    3-Hydroxycinnamic acid
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00028
    2-Ethyl-4-pyridinecarbothioamide (Ethionamide)
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00029
    4-Hydroxyantipyrine
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00030
    Acetylsalicylic acid
    Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00031
    Tris(carboxyethyl)phosphine
  • Several studies were performed. The goal of these studies was to find stabilizer/targeted Lu-complex combinations that showed no significant detectable radio-degradation at a radioactivity concentration of >20 mCi/mL over time and in a preferred embodiment, to find stabilizers and stabilizer combinations able to provide five days of storage at room temperature (a reasonable period if the radiopharmaceutical has to be prepared and shipped) without significant detectable radio-degradation. Those that provided such stability were selected for further evaluation. Of the compounds tested, L-cysteine and the cysteine derivatives L-cysteine ethyl ester or L-cysteine methyl ester, D-, L-, and DL-methionine, L-selenomethionine, gentisic acid (Sodium salt), ascorbic acid (Sodium Salt) and 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt (PDTC) were shown to be most efficacious in this respect when used as individual stabilizers.
  • In practice, a radiolysis protecting solution that contained a mixture of stabilizers proved especially useful. Formulations stabilized by such cocktails maintained excellent radiochemical purity (RCP) values (>95% RCP) for as long as 5 days at room temperature. This stabilizing cocktail is added immediately after formation of the radioactive complex, so would be the second vial of a two-vial kit. The reagents in this radiolysis protecting solution are shown in Table 2:
  • TABLE 2
    Radiolysis Protecting Solution
    Concentration in Radiolysis Protecting
    Reagent Solution
    Gentisic acid
    10 mg/mL
    Ascorbic acid
    50 mg/mL
    Human serum albumin 0.2% (w/v)
    Benzyl alcohol 90 μL/mL
    pH 5.0 citrate buffer 0.05 molar
    D-DL- or L-Methionine, L- 2 mg/mL
    Selenomethionine, or L-cysteine
  • Stability in Radiolysis Protecting Solution: FIG. 4 shows the results obtained when 1 mL of a reaction mixture containing 104 mCi of 177Lu-B was incubated at room temperature with 1 mL of the above radiolysis protecting solution that contained 2 mg/mL DL-methionine, 10 mg/mL gentisic acid, 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid, 0.2% HSA and 90 benzyl alcohol in 0.05 M citrate buffer, pH 5.3.
  • In a similar study, effective radiostabilization (RCP>95%) was achieved for 177Lu-A if the concentration of methionine in the radiolysis protecting solution was increased to 3 mg/mL and all other reagents were held at their previous levels. 177Lu-A was also stable for 5 days when methionine in the stabilizing cocktail is replaced by methionine, L-cysteine or L-selenomethionine.
  • The data in FIG. 5 show the results obtained when 55 mCi of 177Lu-A was incubated for 5 days at room temperature with the following mixture: 1.5 mg/mL L-cysteine; 5 mg/mL gentisic acid; 25 mg/mL ascorbic acid; 1 mg/mL HSA, 45 μL benzyl alcohol in 0.05M citrate buffer, pH 5.3.
  • Similar results to those found using L-cysteine could also be obtained using a radiolysis protecting solution containing L-selenomethionine or L- or D-methionine in the place of cysteine. Preliminary tolerance studies on stabilizing solutions containing these ingredients were performed in mice—no acute adverse effects were noted.
  • Role of the reagents in the radiolysis protecting solution: Studies have indicated that the methionine, L-selenomethionine, L-selenocysteine or L-cysteine in this stabilizing cocktail play a special role in the formulation, as these reagents appear to help prevent the oxidation of the methionine residue present in the GRP receptor-binding peptides to form analogs containing a methionine sulfoxide residue (see, e.g., FIG. 6A or FIG. 6B). As the oxidized methionine form of these peptides (Met=O derivative) is biologically inactive and has substantially reduced targeting ability, prevention of such oxidation is critical.
  • Methionine has been reported recently to be a stabilizer for radiodiagnostic compounds. However, in the present application (vide infra), it was determined that that methionine alone was insufficient to protect the compounds from radiolytic damage when high radioactivity levels are used, although some radiostabilization was observed (see, e.g., FIG. 3). However, the addition of the methionine-containing radiolysis protecting solution described above gives a strong protective effect that is not present when only methionine is used.
  • Organic compounds containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state: Organic compounds containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state, including selenomethionine and selenocysteine have not been reported as a radioprotectant for radiopharmaceuticals, nor has cysteine or other organic compounds containing thiols in the +2 oxidation state. Both of these compounds were found to be radioprotectants in their own right, and to have valuable properties if added to a radiolysis stabilizing solution as described in this disclosure.
  • Cysteine derivatives: L-cysteine, when added into a radiolysis stabilizing solution, appears to help prevent the oxidation of the methionine residue present in the GRP receptor-binding peptides. The ability of L-cysteine and of several cysteine derivatives (by themselves, rather than as part of a stabilizing cocktail) to effect such stabilization has been evaluated. All provide radioprotection to some extent, so the compounds cystamine dihydrochloride, L-cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, L-cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, L-cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, L-cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate are expected to have utility both as individual stabilizers and as components in stabilizing mixtures such as those described herein.
  • Likewise, it was determined that certain thiol-containing compounds, namely cysteine, 2-mercaptoethanol and dithiothreitol (DTT), can not only prevent radiolytically induced oxidation of the methionine residue present in GRP peptides, but can, in fact, reverse the process. As the oxidized methionine form of these peptides is biologically inactive, and has no targeting ability, this is a useful finding (that has not been described in the literature for the radioprotection of radiodiagnostics or radiotherapeutics). These reagents are also potential compounds in the stabilizing mixtures such as those described herein.
  • Dithiocarbamates: The examples provide evidence that dithiocarbamates, in particular the ammonium salt of 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid, provide excellent stability as a single reagent without any additional stabilizers, when added to a radiolabeled peptide after complex formation (2-vial kit). 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid (PDTC) and other dithiocarbamates have not been reported as radioprotectants for either radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic applications. The structure of PDTC is shown below.
  • Structure of 1-pyrrolidinecarbodithioc acid ammonium salt (PDTC)
  • Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00032
  • Two other dithiocarbamates, namely N,N-dimethyl dithiocarbamate and N,N-diethyl dithiocarbamate sodium salts were also evaluated and found to have a radiostabilizing effect, but the compound above was superior.
  • This compound is also extremely effective if added directly to the formulation during complex formation. At concentrations where it is an effective radiostabilizer, it does not interfere with complex formation. This is a clear advantage, as this allows a single-vial formulation, with all components in one vial.
  • Dithiocarbamates such as PDTC also have the added advantage of serving to scavenge adventitious trace metals in the reaction mixture. It has long been known that many radioisotopes (e.g., 90Y, 111In) can contain contaminating non-radioactive metals such as Fe, Zn, or Cu that can compete with the radiometal for the chelate. As the molar concentration of the radiometals used for radiotherapy is often very low, even a small amount of contaminating metal can be highly detrimental to a labeling reaction. This is especially true in formulations where the concentration of ligand has to be kept to a minimum in order to obtain as high a specific activity [i.e., mCi of radioactivity/mmole of ligand] as possible.
  • If PDTC, for example, is added to reaction mixtures, it inhibits interference of adventitious metals, even if the contaminating metals are added in great excess. This result is surprising and unexpected.
  • It is expected that any compound of the general formula shown below will have potential utility.
  • Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00033
  • wherein R1 and R2 are each independently —H, —C1-C8 alkyl, —OR, phenyl, or benzyl (Bn) (either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups) or wherein R1R2N combined=1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl- [optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups] and
    M=H+, Na+, K+, NH4 + or other pharmaceutically acceptable salt forms.
  • Preferred R1, R2 combinations are:
      • -Me, -Me;
      • -Me, —OMe;
      • -Et, -Et;
      • -Et, —OEt
      • -Et, -n-Bu;
      • -Me, —CH2CH2NMe2;
      • -Me, —CH2CH2NMe3 +;
      • -Me, —CH2COOMe),
      • -Bn, -Bn
  • It is expected that oxidized dimers of the compounds above [R1R2NC(S)S]2 will be useful as well.
  • Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00034
  • Use of the meglumine and glutamine compounds below is also envisioned. They have the advantage of being water soluble.
  • Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00035
  • Alternatively, compounds of the form shown below may be used, wherein M is a physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state, such as Mg2+ or Ca2+, and R1 and R2 have the same definition as described above.
  • Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00036
  • These reagents can either be added directly into reaction mixtures during radiolabeled complex preparation, or added after complexation is complete, or both.
  • The compound PDTC, and pharmacologically acceptable salts thereof, is particularly preferred.
  • Formulations with stabilizers added directly to reaction mixture: In most of the work described above, the stabilizer was added after formation of the radioactive complex. A series of studies were performed wherein different potential stabilizers were added directly to the reaction mixture during chelation. Such an approach is highly preferable, if a suitable compound can be found.
  • The following stabilizers were evaluated using this approach: 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt, 2-hydroxybenzothiazole, 2,1,3-benzothiadiazole 5-thio-D-glucose, cystamine dihydrochloride, L-cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, L-cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, L-cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, L-cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate, sodium L-ascorbate (ascorbic acid), 2,5-dihydroxybenzoic acid sodium salt hydrate (gentisic acid), thiamine hydrochloride, L-glutathiorie reduced, 2-ethyl-4-pyridinecarbothioamide (ethionamide), trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt nonahydrate, sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate, sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate, 3-hydroxycinnamic acid, 4-hydroxyantipyrine and acetylsalicylic acid
  • It was found that the best stabilizers for direct addition to the formulation are the following: 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt, D-, L-, or D,L-methionine, Trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt, L-cysteine, or L-Selenomethionine. Of these, L-Selenomethionine and 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid (ammonium salt) or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof are most preferred.
  • Since the stereochemistry of the amino acid is not critical to the stabilization the D-, L-, and D,L-mixtures of all amino acids previously cited are useful, as are pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof. Simple derivatives of these amino acids including, but not limited to, N-alkylation, N-acetylation, C-terminus amidation or esterification are useful as well. It is anticipated that simple dipeptides, tripeptides, tetrapeptides and pentapeptides containing one or more of these amino acids could also be used to stabilize radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic formulations.
  • The following abbreviations are used in the description of the invention:
      • Acetonitrile (ACN)
      • Ethanol (EtOH)
      • Gentisic Acid (GA)
      • Glycine (Gly)
      • High Pressure Liquid Chromatography (HPLC)
      • Histidine (H is)
      • Human Serum Albumin (HSA)
      • Hypophosphorous acid (HPA)
      • Indium (In)
      • Lutetium (Lu)
      • Mercaptoethanol (ME)
      • L- or D-Methionine (Met)
      • Phosphosaline buffer (PBS)
      • 3,4-Pyridinedicarboxylic acid (Sodium salt) (PDCA)
      • 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt (PDTC)
      • Radiochemical purity (RCP)
      • L-Selenomethionine (Se-Met)
      • Technetium (Tc)
      • Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA)
      • Tris(carboxyethyl)phosphine (TCEP)
      • Trityl (Trt)
      • Tryptophan (Trp)
    EXAMPLES Materials
  • Trifluoroacetic acid (TFA), 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt (PDTC), 2-hydroxybenzothiazole, 2,1,3-benzothiadiazole, 5-thio-D-glucose, cystamine dihydrochloride, L-cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, L-cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, L-cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, L-cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate, sodium L-ascorbate (ascorbic acid), 2,5-dihydroxybenzoic acid sodium salt hydrate (gentisic acid), thiamine hydrochloride, L-glutathione reduced, 2-ethyl-4-pyridinecarbothioamide (ethionamide), trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt nonahydrate, sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate, sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate, 3-hydroxycinnamic acid, 4-hydroxyantipyrine and acetylsalicylic acid were purchased from Sigma-Aldrich Chemical Company. Acetic acid, glacial (ultra-pure) were purchased from J. T. Baker. Acetonitrile and sodium acetate, anhydrous (ultra-pure) was purchased from EM Science. D-methionine was purchased from Avocado Research Chemicals Ltd. L-selenomethionine was purchased from Calbiochem. Methanol, citric acid, anhydrous and sodium citrate were purchased from Fisher Scientific Company. Human serum albumin (HSA) was purchased from Sigma. All reagents were used as received. High-specific activity 177LuCl3 (in 0.05 N HCl) was obtained from the University of Missouri Research Reactor, Columbia, Mo. 111InCl3 (in 0.05N HCl) was obtained from either PerkinElmer or Mallinckrodt.
  • COMPOUND A (or Compound A) is the unmetallated ligand DOTA-Gly-ACA-Gln-Trp-Ala-Val-Gly-His-Leu-Met-NH2 (ACA=3-Amino-3-deoxycholic acid). COMPOUND B (or Compound B) is the unmetallated ligand DOTA-Gly-Abz-4-Gln-Trp-Ala-Val-Gly-His-Leu-Met-NH2 (Abz4=4-aminobenzoic acid. The radiolabeled complexes prepared from these compounds are designated herein by the isotope-compound letter, i.e., 177Lu-A is the 177Lu complex of DOTA-Gly-ACA-Gln-Trp-Ala-Val-Gly-His-Leu-Met-NH2) and 177Lu-B is the 177Lu complex of DOTA-Gly-Abz-4-Gln-Trp-Ala-Val-Gly-His-Leu-Met-NH2. The synthesis of Compounds A and B is described in applicants' copending patent application Ser. No. 10/341,577, filed Jan. 13, 2003, which is hereby entirely incorporated by reference.
  • Analytical Methods
  • HPLC Method 1 used an HP-1100 HPLC system (Agilent) with a variable wavelength detector (?=280 nm) and a Canberra radio-detector, a YMC Basic S-5 column (4.6 mm×150 mm, 5 μm) and mobile phases A: Sodium citrate in water (0.02 M, pH 3.0), and B: 20% methanol in acetonitrile. The mobile phase flow rate was 1 mL/min. with a gradient starting at 32% B to 34% B over 30 minutes, 34% to 40% B in 5 minutes, back to 32% B in 5 minutes, then a 5-minute hold for re-equilibration. The injection volume was 20 μL.
  • HPLC Method 2 involved the use of an HP-1100 HPLC system with a variable wavelength detector (?=280 nm) and a Canberra radio-detector, a YMC Basic S-5 column (4.6 mm×150 mm, 5 μm) and mobile phases A: 0.1% TFA and 0.1% acetonitrile in water, and B: 0.1% TFA in acetonitrile. The mobile phase flow rate was 1 mL/min with a gradient starting at 29% B to 32% B over 20 minutes, back to 29% B in 2 minutes, then a 5-minute hold for re-equilibration. The injection volume was 20 μL.
  • HPLC Method 3 involved the use of an HP-1100 HPLC system with a variable wavelength detector (?=280 nm) and a Canberra radio-detector, a C18 column (4.6 mm×250 mm, 5 μm, VYDAC, cat#218TP54) and mobile phases A: 0.1% TFA in water, and B: 0.1% TFA in acetonitrile. The mobile phase flow rate was 1 mL/min with a gradient starting at 29% B to 32% B over 20 minutes, back to 29% B in 3 minutes, then an 8-minute hold for re-equilibration. The injection volume was 20 μL.
  • HPLC Method 4 involved the use of an HP-1100 HPLC system with a variable wavelength detector (?=280 nm) and a Canberra radio-detector, a C18 column (4.6 mm×250 mm, 5 μm, VYDAC, Cat#218TP54) and mobile phases A: 0.1% TFA in water, and B: 0.1% TFA in acetonitrile. The mobile phase flow rate was 1 mL/min. with a gradient starting at 21% B to 24% B over 20 minutes, back to 21% B in 3 minutes, then an 8 minute hold for re-equilibration. The injection volume was 20 μL.
  • HPLC Method 5 involved the use of an HP-1100 HPLC system with a variable wavelength detector (?=280 nm) and a Canberra radio-detector, a Stellar Phases Rigel C18 column (4.6 mm×150 mm, 5 μm) and mobile phases A: 0.1% TFA and 0.1% ACN in water, and B: 0.1% TFA in ACN. The mobile phase flow rate was 1 mL/min. with a gradient starting at 20% B, ramping to 24% B over 20 minutes, back to 20% B in 2 minutes, then a 3 minute hold for re-equilibration. The injection volume was 10 μL.
  • Example 1 Comparison of the Radioprotective Effects of Various Amino Acids when Added to Pre-Formed 177Lu-GRP Binding Compounds 177Lu-A or 177Lu-B
  • EXAMPLE 1 shows the results obtained for a series of amino acids that were added individually to a solution of 177Lu-A or 177Lu-B and then incubated at room temperature over 48 hours, as well as results for an unstabilized control. In these reactions, the amino acid concentration was 6.6 mg/mL, 177Lu-A and 177Lu-B had a concentration of ˜20 mCi/mL, and 3.5 mCi of 177Lu was used in each reaction.
  • Solutions of the individual amino acids L-Methionine, L-Selenomethionine, L-cysteine HCl.H2O, L-Tryptophan, L-Histidine, and Glycine were prepared at a concentration of 10 mg/mL in 10 mM Dulbecco's phosphate-buffered saline, pH 7.0 [PBS].
  • 177Lu-A and 177Lu-B were prepared by adding 300 μL of 0.2 M NaOAc (pH 5.0), 40 μg Compound A or B and 20 mCi of 177LuCl3 into a reaction vial. The mixture was incubated at 100° C. for five minutes, then cooled to room temperature. Free (uncomplexed) 177Lu in the reaction solution was then scavenged (chelated) by adding 10 μL of a 10% Na2EDTA.2H2O solution in water. A 50 μL aliquot of the reaction solution (˜3.5 mCi) was mixed with 100 μL of one of the amino acid solutions above or a PBS control in a 2-mL autosampler vial. The final radioactive concentration of each sample was ˜20 mCi/mL. The samples were stored in the autosampler chamber, and their stability over 48 hours was analyzed using HPLC Method 3 (177Lu-A) or HPLC Method 4 (177Lu-B). Chromatograms from this study at the 48-hour time point are shown in FIG. 7.
  • In the control reaction with no stabilizer, radiochemical purity (RCP) dropped from >95% to 1.3% within 24 hrs at room temperature. In contrast, when methionine, L-selenomethionine or cysteine was added, RCP remained greater than 90% for 48 hours.
  • Table 3 below shows the RCP values obtained in this study for all samples of 177Lu-A at t=0, 24, and 48 hours.
  • TABLE 3
    Evaluation of amino acids as radioprotectants for 177Lu-A. Stability
    comparison made by adding different individual amino acids (6.6 mg/mL)
    to 177Lu-A at a radioactive concentration of ~20 mCi/mL, followed
    by storage at room temperature for up to 48 hours. (3.5 mCi total)
    0-1 h 24-h 48-h
    Met═O Met═O RCP Met═O RCP
    Stabilizer added (%) RCP (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
    Methionine 0 100 0.7 99.3 5.1 94
    Se-Met 0 100 0.9 99.1 0.1 99.9
    Cysteine 0 100 1.2 98.8 5.7 94.3
    Tryptophan 4.5 95.5 46.8 51.4 81.8 18.2
    Glycine 3.6 96.4 24.2 14.6 13.8 0
    Histidine 7.5 92.5 44 4.6 29.5 0
    Control (PBS) 4.5 76.5 1.8 1.3 0 0
  • * Only RCP and percentage of the methionine oxidized (Met=O) form of 177Lu-A are listed; the remaining activity is in the form of unidentified degradants. These results demonstrate that the amino acids tested varied widely in their ability to stabilize 177Lu-A and 177Lu-B. Of the amino acids tested in this study, methionine, L-selenomethionine or L-cysteine provided the highest degree of protection against radiolytic decomposition of the 177Lu-labeled peptides. In this study, it was found that tryptophan, a compound previously reported to be an effective stabilizer surprisingly did not protect against oxidation of the methionine residue present in the targeting peptides, although cysteine, methionine and selenomethionine were effective.
  • Example 2 Further Evaluation of the Radioprotective Effect of L-methionine for Radioprotection of 177Lu-A (50 mCi/2 mL)
  • Based on the results seen in EXAMPLE 1, the ability of L-methionine to protect 177Lu-A when added after complex formation was studied. In contrast to EXAMPLE 1 above, in this reaction, 50 mCi of 177Lu-A was used, rather than 15 mCi.
  • 177Lu-A was formed by adding ˜70 μg of Compound A and 50 mCi of 177LuCl3 (molar ratio of peptide to Lutetium of 3:1) to 1 mL of 0.2M NaOAc, pH 5.0. The mixture was heated at 100° C. for 5 min, cooled to room temperature in a water bath, and 1 mL of a 5 mg/mL L-methionine solution in water and 1 mg Na2EDTA.2H2O was added into the reaction vial. The chromatograms in FIG. 8 and the data in Table 4 below demonstrate the changes in radiochemical purity observed over 5 days at room temperature, when analyzed by reversed phase HPLC using HPLC Method 3. Table 4 summarizes the results shown in FIG. 8.
  • TABLE 4
    177Lu-A (50 mCi in 2 mL) stabilized by the addition of 2.5 mg/mL
    L-methionine [Met] over 5 days incubation at room temperature (% RCP):
    % RCP t = 0 to 5 days
    Stabilizer 0-d 1-d 2-d 5-d
    5 mg Met 96.1 53.5 26.9 0
  • In EXAMPLE 1, methionine at a concentration of 2.5 mg/mL was able to stabilize 3.5 mCi of 177Lu-A against radiolysis for 5 days. However, the results seen in EXAMPLE 2 show that methionine is unable to stabilize the same complex when the amount of radioactivity is increased to 50 mCi. Almost complete decomposition of the complex was observed over 5 days, when only L-methionine was used as a stabilizer. As current practice dictates the use of 100 mCi or more of a radiolabeled peptide for radiotherapeutic applications, it is clear that a more efficacious stabilizer or stabilizer combination is required.
  • Similar studies were performed with L-cysteine, selenomethionine, sodium ascorbate, gentisic acid and HSA. None of them provided sufficient stabilization to use alone with the high radioactivity levels tested.
  • Example 3 Evaluation of the Radioprotective Effect of Various Reagents when Added to Pre-Formed 177Lu-A (3.5 mCi)
  • The list of the potential radiolysis protecting agents tested in this experiment is as follows:
  • 1. Ascorbic acid (Sodium salt form)
  • 2. Gentisic acid (Sodium salt faun)
  • 3. Human Serum Albumin (HSA)
  • 4. 3,4-pyridinedicarboxylic acid (Sodium salt) (PDCA)
  • 5. 10% Ethanol aqueous solution
  • 6. 2% Hypophosphorous acid (HPA)
  • 7. 2% Mercaptoethanol (ME)
  • 8. Tris(carboxyethyl)phosphine (TCEP)
  • 9. Control (Phosphosaline buffer, pH 7.0)
  • Reagents 1-5 have been reported previously to be potentially useful as stabilizers for radiopharmaceuticals. Reagents 6-8 are compounds that were tested to determine their ability to serve as reducing agents for any methionine sulfoxide residues that formed as a result of radiolysis. Reagent 9 was used in the unstabilized control.
  • 177Lu-A was prepared by adding 300 μL of 0.2 M NaOAc (pH 5.0), 40 μg Compound A and 20 mCi of 177LuCl3 into a reaction vial. The mixture was incubated at 100° C. for five minutes, and then cooled to room temperature. Free 177Lu was scavenged by adding 10 μL of 10% Na2EDTA.2H2O. A 504 aliquot of the reaction solution (−3.5 mCi) and 100 μL of a 10 mg/mL solution of one of the reagents above in 10 mM, pH 7.0 PBS was added into a 2-mL autosampler vial. Alternatively, for reagents 5-7, the solution was adjusted to contain 10% Ethanol, 2% Hypophosphorous acid, or 2% Mercaptoethanol. The final radioactivity concentration was about 20 mCi/mL. The samples were stored in the autosampler chamber, and their stability was analyzed over time. The results obtained are shown in Table 5 below.
  • TABLE 5
    Stability of 177Lu-A at a radioactivity concentration of ~20 mCi/mL,
    when incubated at room temperature over time with potential non-amino
    acid radiolysis protecting agents at a concentration of 6.6 mg/mL, or as
    otherwise mentioned*.
    0-h 24-h 48-h
    Met═O RCP Met═O RCP Met═O RCP
    (%) (%) (%) (%) (%) (%)
    Ascorbic acid 2.5 97.5 11.8 72.1 14.2 24.9
    Gentisic acid 2.4 97.6 9.2 90.8 17.2 82.8
    HSA 4.4 95.6 13 20 6.2 2.5
    PDCA 3.4 86.6 5 14.1 N/A N/A
    10% Ethanol 1.4 98.6 7.2 92.8 13.5 80.6
    TCEP** 7.2 96.1 0 23.4 0 6.2
    % HPA*** 0 0 0 0 0 0
    2% ME 0.1 91.5 9.3 81.8 13.8 76.2
    Control (PBS) 2.5 92.5 0 0 0 0
    *Ethanol, Hypophosphorous acid (HPA) and Mercaptoethanol (ME) are in liquid form.
    **TCEP = tris carboxyethyl phosphine
    **2% Hypophosphorous acid solution was prepared in 0.1M, pH 7.8 phosphorous buffer to get a final pH of 5.5.
    PBS = Phosphosaline buffer, pH 7.0
  • Table 5 above shows the results of a comparative study to determine the radiostabilizing effect of several compounds when added to 177Lu-A after complex formation. Both the ability of these additives to prevent a decrease in RCP and their ability to inhibit the oxidation of the Methionine residue in 177Lu-A were studied.
  • It was found that under the test conditions used, none of the eight reagents tested [Ascorbic acid (Sodium salt), gentisic acid (Sodium salt), Human Serum Albumin (HSA), Tris(carboxyethyl)phosphine (TCEP), 3,4-pyridinedicarboxylic acid (Sodium salt) (PDCA), 2% hypophosphorous acid (HPA), 2% mercaptoethanol (ME), or 10% ethanol aqueous solution] provided adequate radiostability (RCP>90%) for 48 hours. This result was unexpected, as gentisic acid, ascorbic acid, HSA and 3,4-pyridinedicarboxylic acid have all been reported by others to provide satisfactory protection against radiolysis for other radiopharmaceuticals. Although some radioprotection was observed when compared to the control in PBS, the previously reported stabilizers ascorbic acid, gentisic acid, and HSA were insufficient to maintain 48 hour stability at an RCP value greater than 90%. The reagent 3,4-pyridinedicarboxylic acid, previously reported as an effective radiostabilizer, was found to interfere badly with the labeling reaction. Mercaptoethanol and ethanol provided some degree of radiostabilization, but again, RCP values of <90% were found after 48 hours. TCEP and HPA were ineffective under the conditions used.
  • Example 4 Effect of Methionine-Containing Radiolysis Protecting Solution on RCP of 177Lu-A and 177Lu-B (50 mCi)
  • In the studies described in EXAMPLES 1-3, it was found that no single reagent tested was entirely effective as a radioprotectant that could provide protection from radiolytic decomposition of 177Lu-GRP binding peptides at high radioactivity levels, especially with respect to oxidation of the terminal Methionine residue.
  • A Radiolysis Protecting Solution was prepared to contain 10 mg/mL gentisic acid; 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid sodium salt; 2 mg/mL HSA; 2.98 mg/mL L-methionine, 0.9% (v:v) benzyl alcohol and 1 mg/mL of Na2EDTA.2H2O in 0.05 M, pH 5.3 citrate buffer. To a 7-mL vial were added 0.2M NaOAc buffer (1.0 mL, pH 5.0), Compound A or Compound B (˜70 μg) and 50 mCi of 177LuCl3. The mixture was incubated at 100° C. for 5 min, and then cooled to room temperature with a water bath. A 1-mL aliquot of the Radiolysis Protecting Solution was immediately added. The reaction vial was stored in an autosampler chamber and the stability was analyzed by Reversed Phase HPLC over time, using HPLC Methods 3 and 4. The results obtained for 177Lu-B are shown in the chromatograms in FIG. 9.
  • Similar results were obtained for 177Lu-A (see Table 6 below).
  • TABLE 6
    Stability comparison of 177Lu-A or 177Lu-B (50 mCi/2 mL) in a
    Radiolysis Protecting Solution containing L-methionine over
    5 days incubation at room temperature (% RCP)
    % RCP
    0-d 1-d 2-d 5-d
    177Lu-A 100 100 100 100
    177Lu-B 99.8 99.3 99.6 99.8
  • These results demonstrate that when a radiolysis protecting solution containing gentisic acid, ascorbic acid, benzyl alcohol, methionine and HSA in citrate buffer is added to 177Lu-A or 177Lu-B, excellent radiostability is obtained, as indicated by no significant drop in the RCP over five days. This result was unexpected, as none of the reagents on their own were capable of providing stability for at least 5 days at room temperature, as indicated by a radiochemical purity of >99% after 120 hours. The radiostability provided by the methionine-containing Radiolysis Protecting Solutions would not have been predicted based on the efficacy of the individual reagents.
  • Example 5 Effect of L-Selenomethionine-Containing Radiolysis Protecting Solution on RCP of 177Lu-A and 177Lu-B (50 mCi/2 mL)
  • 177Lu-A and 177Lu-B were prepared at a 50 mCi level as described in EXAMPLE 4. Immediately after cooling the reaction mixtures to room temperature, 1 mL of a Radiolysis Protecting solution was added, containing 10 mg/mL gentisic acid; 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid sodium salt; 2 mg/mL HSA; 3.92 mg/mL L-selenomethionine, 0.9% (v:v) benzyl alcohol and 1 mg/mL of Na2EDTA.2H2O in 0.05 M, pH 5.3 citrate buffer. The reaction vials were stored in the autosampler chamber and the stability was analyzed by RP-HPLC over time using HPLC Methods 3 [177Lu-A] or 4 [177Lu-B]. The results are shown in Table 7 below.
  • TABLE 7
    Stability of 177Lu-A or 177Lu-B in Radiolysis Protecting
    Solution containing L-selenomethionine over 5 days
    incubation at room temperature (% RCP).
    % RCP
    Complex 0-d 1-d 2-d 3-d 5-d
    177Lu-A 97.6 98.2 97.5 97.8 99.4
    177Lu-B 95.8 95.7 96.2 96.7 98.4
  • These results were unexpected, as none of the reagents on their own were capable of providing stability for at least 5 days at room temperature, as indicated by a radiochemical purity of >98% after 120 hours. The radiostability provided by the selenomethionine-containing Radiolysis Protecting Solutions would not have been predicted based on the efficacy of the individual reagents.
  • Example 6
  • Effect of L-Cysteine-Containing Radiolysis Protecting Solution on RCP of 177Lu-A and 177Lu-B (50 mCi/2 mL)
  • 177Lu-A and 177Lu-B were prepared at a 50 mCi level as described in EXAMPLE 4. Immediately after cooling the reaction mixtures to room temperature, 1 mL of a Radiolysis Protecting Solution was added, containing 10 mg/mL gentisic Acid; 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid sodium salt, 2 mg/mL HSA, (2 mg/mL or 3.52 mg/mL) L-cysteine, 0.9% (v/v) benzyl alcohol and 1 mg/mL of Na2EDTA.2H2O in 0.05 M, pH 5.3 citrate buffer. The reaction vials were stored in the autosampler chamber and the stability was analyzed by RP-HPLC over time using HPLC Methods 3 [177Lu-A] or 4 [177Lu-B]. The results obtained for 177Lu-A are shown in Table 8 below. Similar results were obtained for 177Lu-B.
  • TABLE 8
    Stability of 177Lu-A (50 mCi/2 mL) in Radiolysis Protecting Solution
    containing L-cysteine at 1.0 or 1.75 mg/mL over 5 days incubation
    at room temperature (% RCP)
    Concentration
    of L-cysteine % RCP
    (mg/mL) 0-d 1-d 2-d 3-d 5-d
    1.0 100 99.9 98.4 97.5 96.9
    1.75 100 99.9 98.9 95.8 93.3
  • These results were unexpected, as none of the reagents on their own were capable of providing stability for at least 5 days at room temperature, as indicated by a radiochemical purity of >93% after 120 hours. The radiostability provided by the cysteine-containing Radiolysis Protecting Solutions would not have been predicted based on the efficacy of the individual reagents.
  • Example 7 Effect of Radiolysis Protecting Solution on RCP of 177Lu-A (50 mCi/2 mL)
  • 177Lu-A was prepared at a 50 mCi level as described in EXAMPLE 4. Immediately after cooling the reaction mixture to room temperature, 1 mL of a Radiolysis Protecting Solution was added, that contained 10 mg/mL gentisic acid; 50 mg/mL ascorbic acid sodium salt; 2 mg/mL HSA; 0.9% (v:v) benzyl alcohol and 1 mg/mL of Na2EDTA.2H2O in 0.05 M, pH 5.3 citrate buffer. The reaction vial was stored in an autosampler chamber and the stability was analyzed by RP-HPLC over time. The results are shown in Table 9 below.
  • TABLE 9
    Stability of 177Lu-A (50 mCi/2 mL) in a Radiolysis Protecting Solution
    over 5 days incubation at room temperature (% RCP)
    Concentration
    of L-cysteine % RCP
    (mg/mL) 0-d 1-d 2-d 3-d 5-d
    0 100/100 94.9/99.2 93.6/97.3 ND/95.1 90.4/92.9
    ND = not determined
  • The results shown in EXAMPLES 4-7 demonstrate that addition of methionine (Example 4), selenomethionine (Example 5) or cysteine (Example 6) to the Radiolysis Protecting Solution described in EXAMPLE 7 provides added benefit beyond that of Radiolysis Protecting Solution prepared without these added amino acids.
  • Example 8 Effect of HSA or AA on the Radiostability of 177Lu-B when Added after Radiolabeling
  • In this example, the effect of two reagents in the Radiolysis Stabilizing Solution, HSA and ascorbic acid; both known for their radioprotecting ability, were tested individually at very high concentrations (50-100 mg/mL). As individual reagents, they were again found insufficient to maintain 177Lu-B at RCP values >95% for more than 24 hours. 177Lu-B was formulated as follows: To a 5-mL glass vial, 1 mL of 0.2 M NaOAc buffer (pH 4.8), 12 μL (50 mCi) of 177LuCl3 and 30 pt of a 5 mg/mL solution of COMPOUND B in 0.01N HCl were added, and the vial was heated at 100° C. for 5 min. After being cooled in a water bath, the reaction mixture was diluted 1:1 by addition of 1 mL of one of the stabilizing solutions below. The samples were then stored in an autosampler (which maintained an average temperature that was ˜6° C. higher than room temperature) and analyzed by RP-HPLC for up to 120 hours.
  • Studies with HSA and Ascorbic Acid: In this study, three different stabilizing solutions (a, b, or c) were evaluated and compared.
  • a) Human Serum Albumin (HSA) was dissolved to a concentration of 100 mg/mL in N2-purged 0.05 M, pH 5.0 citrate buffer containing 1 mg/mL Na2EDTA.2H2O
  • b) Sodium ascorbate (AA) 99+% was dissolved to a concentration of 100 mg/mL in N2-purged 0.05 M, pH 5.0 citrate buffer containing) mg/mL Na2EDTA.2H2O
  • c) Sodium Ascorbate 99+% was dissolved to concentration of 50 mg/mL in N2-purged 0.05 M, pH 5.0 citrate buffer containing 0.9% Benzyl alcohol and 1 mg/mL Na2EDTA.2H2O
  • The RCP results obtained are shown in Table 10.
  • TABLE 10
    Stability of 177Lu-B mixed 1:1 with stabilizing solutions a-c to provide a) HSA
    with a final concentration of 50 mg/mL b) AA with a final concentration of either
    50 mg/mL or c) 25 mg/mL. Final 177Lu-B concentration is 25 mCi/mL:
    177Lu-B
    diluted 1:1 with the
    indicated Stabilizing (% RCP)
    Solution 0-h 3-h 6-h 9-h 12-h 24-h 48-h 72-h 120-h
    Stabilizing Solution a 100 88.3 59.6 39.1 24.0 2.9 0 0 0
    100 mg/mL HSA
    Stabilizing Solution b 99.9 99.9 99.7 99.1 98.7 96.1 93.6 92.0 91.7
    100 mg/mL AA
    Stabilizing Solution c 99.9 99.9 99.8 99.1 98.1 96.0 92.5 92.8 92.2
    50 mg/mL AA + BA
  • The results of Example 8 above indicate that either HSA alone or ascorbic acid alone could not maintain an RCP of >95% for times longer than 24 hours.
  • The results of Example 1-8 indicate that a Radiolysis Protecting Solution containing gentisic acid, ascorbic acid, Human Serum Albumin, benzyl alcohol and either cysteine, selenomethionine, or methionine and (ethanol in 0.05M citrate buffer) will stabilize 177Lu-A or 177Lu-B if added after labeling, and that such a mixture will provide better radiostability than any of the reagents when added in isolation.
  • Such an approach would require a two-vial kit, with one vial containing the reagents required to prepare the radiolabeled product; the other containing the Radiolysis Protecting Solution, which is added after complex formation. Several studies were therefore performed to try and find a single-vial kit, wherein both the reagents needed to form 177Lu-A or 177Lu-B and the reagents needed to stabilize the resulting complex against radiolysis were combined into a single vial.
  • Example 9 Preparation, Labeling Efficiency and Stability of 177Lu-A when Prepared in the Presence of L-Cysteine Hydrochloride Monohydrate, Gentisic Acid, Ascorbic Acid, L-Selenomethionine or D-Methionine (1 mg/mL), Individually, as Stabilizers
  • In this study, each of the reagents in the stabilizing buffer (cysteine, gentisic acid, ascorbic acid, selenomethionine and methionine was tested individually by adding 1.0 mg/mL of the individual reagent directly to radiolabeling reactions containing a small amount of radioactivity (3.5 mCi). None interfered with the labeling reaction, but only selenomethionine and methionine showed good protection over time at the low radioactivity levels used.
  • Each individual stabilizer was prepared at a concentration of 1 mg/mL in sodium acetate (NaOAc) buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.8). To lead-shielded 4-mL vials was added 200 pt of the individual NaOAc-stabilizer solutions, 2.72-3.64 mCi 177LuCl3 and 4.6-6 μg COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1 for all samples. The reaction mixture was heated to 100° C. for 5 minutes, and then cooled for 5 minutes in an ambient-temperature water bath. To each sample, 10 μL of 2% Na2EDTA.2H2O in water was added, and then each was divided into two 100-4 aliquots. One aliquot was analyzed by HPLC (Method 1) and then stored at room temperature in a sealed lead container for 24 hours. The other aliquot was stored frozen (−10° C.) for 24 hours. Each sample was analyzed at t=24 h. The radiochemical purity (RCP) percentage data obtained are listed in Table 11.
  • TABLE 11
    RCP Data for 177Lu-A (2.7-3.7 mCi) when Prepared in the Presence
    of L-Cysteine Hydrochloride Monohydrate, Gentisic Acid, Ascorbic
    acid, L-Selenomethionine or D-Methionine (1 mg/mL), Individually,
    as Stabilizers
    COMPOUND RCP %
    (1 mg/mL) mCi A t = 24 h t = 24 h
    Stabilizer 177Lu Conc. (μg/mL) t = 0 h (room temp) (frozen)
    L-cysteine 3.64 25.4 100 83.3 82.1
    Gentisic acid 2.76 23.0 100 64.9 84.3
    Ascorbic acid 3.19 30.0 98.7 ND ND
    L-Se-Met 2.72 23.0 100 100 99.2
    D-Methionine 2.76 23.0 100 100 100
    ND = not determined
  • The results demonstrate that none of the five stabilizers interferes with the labeling reaction and that each provides stability during the reaction at the 1-mg/mL concentration used. However, L-selenomethionine and D-methionine are better stabilizers than the others tested, at this concentration, during 24 hours of storage, both at room temperature and frozen. Data for the stored samples using ascorbic acid were not collected.
  • Example 10 Preparation, Labeling Efficiency and Stability of 177Lu-A when Prepared in the Presence of L-Cysteine Hydrochloride Monohydrate, Gentisic Acid, Ascorbic Acid, L-Selenomethionine or D-Methionine (2.5 mg/mL), Individually, as Stabilizers
  • In Examples 10 and 11, reagents in the stabilizing buffer (cysteine, gentisic acid, ascorbic acid, selenomethionine or methionine were tested individually by adding 2.5 mg/mL (Example 10) or 5.0 mg/mL (Example 11) of the individual reagents directly to radiolabeling reactions containing a small amount of radioactivity (3.5 mCi). When the amount of stabilizers was increased to 2.5 mg/mL and 5 mg/mL to decrease the potential for radiolytic damage at high activity levels, it was found again that gentisic acid, ascorbic acid and cysteine could not provide adequate radioprotection for 24 hours, even at radioactivity amounts less than 5 mCi. Each stabilizer was prepared at a concentration of 2.5 mg/mL in sodium acetate (NaOAc) buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.8). To lead-shielded 4-mL vials was added 200 μL of the individual NaOAc-stabilizer solutions, 3.58 mCi 177LuCl3 (avg) and 5.08 μg COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1 for all samples. The reaction mixtures were heated to 100° C. for 5 minutes, then cooled, treated with Na2EDTA.2H2O, subdivided and stored as described in Example 9. The radiochemical purity (RCP) percentage data obtained are listed in Table 12.
  • TABLE 12
    RCP Data for 177Lu-A when Prepared in the Presence of L-Cysteine
    Hydrochloride Monohydrate, Gentisic acid, Ascorbic acid,
    L-Selenomethionine or D-Methionine (2.5 mg/mL) as Stabilizers
    COMPOUND RCP %
    (2.5 mg/mL) mCi A t = 24 h t = 24 h
    Stabilizer 177Lu Conc. (μg/mL) t = 0 h (room temp) (frozen)
    L-Cysteine 3.6 24.8 100 88.3 51.0
    Gentisic acid 3.6 24.8 100 78.6 82.8
    Ascorbic acid 3.6 24.8 ND 88.1 78.4
    L-Seleno- 3.6 24.8 95.7 95.6 94.7
    Methionine
    D-Methionine 3.6 24.8 100 99.6 100
    ND = not determined

    The results demonstrate that at the 2.5-mg/mL concentration, L-cysteine, gentisic acid and D-methionine do not interfere with the labeling reaction and provide stability during the reaction. L-Selenomethionine either interferes somewhat or provides less stability during the reaction. L-Selenomethionine and D-methionine are better stabilizers, at this concentration, during 24 hours of storage, both at room temperature and frozen. Data for the t=0 h sample using Ascorbic Acid was not collected.
  • Example 11
  • Preparation, Labeling Efficiency and Stability of 177Lu-A When Prepared in the Presence of L-Cysteine Hydrochloride Monohydrate, Gentisic Acid, Ascorbic acid, L-Selenomethionine or D-Methionine (5 mg/mL) as Stabilizers
  • Each stabilizer was prepared at a concentration of 5 mg/mL in sodium acetate (NaOAc) buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.8). To lead-shielded 4-mL vials were added 200 μL of the individual stabilizer solutions, 3.55 mCi 177LuCl3 (avg) and 5.44 μg COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). A second set of replicates of each sample was prepared, using the individual stabilizers. To these was added 4.37 mCi 177LuCl3 (avg) and 6.7 μg (avg) COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to lutetium was 3:1 for all samples. The reaction mixture was heated to 100° C. for 5 minutes then cooled for 5 minutes in an ambient-temperature water bath. To each sample, 10 μl, of 2% Na2EDTA.2H2O in water was added, then each was analyzed by HPLC (Method 1 for the first set of replicates; Method 2 for the second set of replicates). The second set of replicates were stored and analyzed again at t=24 h. The radiochemical purity (RCP) percentage data obtained are given in Table 13 below.
  • TABLE 13
    RCP Data for 177Lu-A when Prepared in the Presence of L-Cysteine
    Hydrochloride Monohydrate, Gentisic acid, Ascorbic acid,
    L-Selenomethionine or D-Methionine (5 mg/mL) as Stabilizers
    Replicate 1 Replicate 2 Replicate 2
    (5 mg/mL) RCP % RCP % RCP %
    Stabilizer t = 0 h t = 0 h t = 24 h
    L-cysteine 93.3 91.0 67.4
    Gentisic acid 93.9 96.6 75.2
    Ascorbic acid 87.6 30.2 24.5
    L-Selenomethionine 57.5 60.6 57.1
    D-Methionine 100 97.6 80.7
  • The results demonstrate that at the 5-mg/mL concentration, D-methionine does not interfere with the labeling reaction and provides stability during the reaction. L-cysteine, gentisic acid, ascorbic acid and L-selenomethionine either interfere with the labeling reaction or provide less stability during the reaction. Reproducibility between replicates at the t=0 h time point was adequate for each stabilizer except ascorbic acid. Ascorbic acid and L-selenomethionine provided better stability during 24 hours of storage (as compared to their t=0 h RCP % values) than L-cysteine, gentisic acid or D-methionine.
  • Example 12 Stability of 177Lu-A when Stabilized after Complex Preparation Using 2-Ethyl-4-pyridinecarbothioamide (Ethionamide), Trithiocyanuric Acid Trisodium Salt Nonahydrate, Sodium Dimethyldithiocarbamate Hydrate or Sodium Diethyldithiocarbamate Trihydrate as Stabilizers
  • Compounds containing the —C═S moiety [dithiocarbamates and ethionamide] were examined in this study. When added after complex preparation, the compounds ethionamide, tricyanuric acid, and dimethyldithiocarbamic acid and its diethyl analog all provided good radiostability.
  • Each individual stabilizer was prepared at a concentration of 10 mg/mL in water. Ethionamide was dissolved in EtOH. To a lead-shielded 4-mL vial was added 500 μL of NaOAc buffer (0.2M, pH 4.8), 19.6 mCi 177LuCl3 and 30 μg COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1. The reaction mixture was heated to 100° C. for 5 minutes, then cooled for 5 minutes in an ambient-temperature water bath. After cooling, 20 μL of 2% Na2EDTA.2H2O in water was added, and then four 100-μL aliquots of the sample (2.78 mCi 177Lu avg each) were transferred to individual autosampler vials. To an aliquot, 100 μL of one of the stabilizer solutions (1 mg of stabilizer) was added. Each aliquot was analyzed (t=0 h) by HPLC (Method 2) and stored at room temperature for 48 hours. All samples were analyzed again at t=24 h and 48 h. The radiochemical purity (RCP) percentage data obtained are listed in Table 14.
  • TABLE 14
    RCP Data for 177Lu-A When Stabilized After Complex Preparation Using
    2-Ethyl-4-pyridinecarbothioamide (Ethionamide), Trithiocyanuric acid
    trisodium salt nonahydrate, Sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate or
    Sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate as Stabilizers. (13.9 mCi/mL)
    RCP % RCP % RCP %
    Stabilizer (5 mg/mL) t = 0 h t = 24 h t = 48 h
    Ethionamide 97.4 97.0 94.7
    Trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt 96.9 95.9 100
    nonahydrate
    Sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate 97.3 97.1 96.6
    Sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate 97.8 97.1 96.2
  • The results demonstrate that, at a 5-mg/mL concentration, each of the stabilizers provided stability for 177Lu-A at a radioconcentration of 13.9 mCi/mL for up to 48 hours of storage.
  • Example 13 Preparation, Labeling Efficiency and Stability of 177Lu-A when Prepared in the Presence of 2-Ethyl-4′-pyridinecarbothioamide (Ethionamide), Trithiocyanuric Acid Trisodium Salt Nonahydrate, Sodium Dimethyldithiocarbamate Hydrate, or Sodium Diethyldithiocarbamate Trihydrate as Stabilizers
  • In Example 12, compounds containing the —C═S moiety [dithiocarbamates and ethionamide] were added after radiolabeling, and found to be effective radiostabilizers. In Example 13, these compounds were added directly to the reaction mixture before or at the time of radiolabeling.
  • 10 ing/mL solutions of trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt nonahydrate, sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate, and sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate were prepared by dissolving them in water. Ethionamide was prepared at a 10 mg/mL concentration by dissolving it in EtOH. To individual, lead-shielded, 4-mL vials were added 200 μL, of NaOAc buffer (0.2M, pH 4.8), 100 μL of stabilizer solution (1 mg of stabilizer), 525 mCi 177LuCl3 (avg) and 8.7 μg (avg) COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). Another sample was prepared to which was added 100 μL of ethanol only (no stabilizer), for use as a control sample. The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1 for all samples. The reaction mixture was heated to 100° C. for 5 minutes then cooled for 5 minutes in an ambient-temperature water bath. To each sample, 10 μL of 2% Na2EDTA.2H2O in water was added, and then each was analyzed by HPLC (Method 2) and stored at room temperature for up to 96 hours. The radiochemical purity (RCP) percentage data obtained are listed in Table 15.
  • TABLE 15
    RCP Data for 177Lu-A When Prepared in the Presence of 2-Ethyl-4-
    pyridinecarbothioamide (Ethionamide), Trithiocyanuric acid trisodium
    salt nonahydrate, Sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate, or Sodium
    diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate as Stabilizers
    RCP % RCP % RCP %
    Stabilizer (~3.33 mg/mL) t = 0 h t = 24 h t = 96 h
    Ethanol (no stabilizer) 100 59.3
    Ethionamide 100 98.1 94.6
    Trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt 100 100 0 
    nonahydrate
    Sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate 69.3 1.5
    Sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate 52.8 0
  • The results demonstrate that, at a stabilizer concentration of 3.33-mg/mL, ethanol, ethionamide and trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt nonahydrate did not interfere with the labeling reaction and each provided stability during the reaction. Sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate and sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate interfered with the reaction or provide less stability during the reaction. Ethionamide and trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt nonahydrate provided stability for up to 24 hours and 96 hours of storage, respectively. In the case of trithiocyanuric acid trisodium salt nonahydrate, the drop in stability observed between 24 and 96 hours was probably due to an insufficient amount of the compound to maintain stability. In Example 12, a higher concentration of this compound did maintain stability for 48 hours.
  • Example 14 Preparation, Labeling Efficiency and Solution Stability of 177Lu-A when Prepared in the Presence of Thiamine Hydrochloride, L-Glutathione, 3-Hydroxycinnamic Acid, 4-Hydroxyantipyrine, Acetylsalicylic Acid, 2-Hydroxybenzothiazole or 2,1,3-Benzothiadiazole as Stabilizers
  • 10 mg/mL solutions of thiamine hydrochloride and L-glutathione were prepared by dissolving them in water. 10 mg/mL solutions of 3-hydroxycinnamic acid, 4-hydroxyantipyrine and acetylsalicylic acid were prepared by dissolving them in 50% EtOH/water. 10 mg/mL solutions of 2-hydroxybenzothiazole and 2,1,3-benzothiadiazole were prepared by dissolving them in EtOH. To individual, lead-shielded 4-mL vials were added 200 μL of NaOAc buffer (0.2M, pH 4.8), 1004 of stabilizer solution (1 mg of stabilizer), 5.28 mCi 177LuCl3 (avg) and 9.6 μg (avg) COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1 for all samples. The reaction mixtures were heated, cooled, treated with Na2EDTA.2H2O and analyzed by HPLC as described in Example 13, then stored at room temperature for 72 hours, at which time all samples were analyzed again. The radiochemical purity (RCP) percentage data obtained are listed in Table 16.
  • TABLE 16
    RCP Data for 177Lu-A When Prepared and Stored in the Presence of
    Thiamine Hydrochloride, L-Glutathione, 3-Hydroxycinnamic acid,
    4-Hydroxyantipyrine Acetylsalicylic acid, 2-Hydroxybenzothiazole or
    2,1,3-Benzothiadiazole as Stabilizers
    RCP (%) RCP (%)
    Stabilizer (3.33 mg/mL) t = 0 h t = 72 h
    Thiamine hydrochloride 97.0 0
    L-Glutathione 91.1 0
    3-Hydroxycinnamic acid 96.6 0
    4-Hydroxyantipyrine 99.9 0
    Acetylsalicylic acid 73.0 0
    2-Hydroxybenzothiazole 96.2 9.6
    2,1,3-Benzothiadiazole 98.6 3.1
  • The results demonstrate that, at the 3.33-mg/mL concentration, thiamine hydrochloride, 3-hydroxycinnamic acid, 4-hydroxyantipyrine, 2-hydroxybenzothiazole and 2,1,3-benzothiadiazole do not significantly interfere with the 177Lu-A labeling reaction and that they provide effective radiostability during the labeling reaction. L-Glutathione and acetylsalicylic acid either interfere with the labeling reaction or provide less stability during the reaction under the conditions tested. None of the stabilizers tested provided significant stability for up to 72 hours of storage.
  • Example 15
  • In a following experiment, the dithiocarbamate 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid, ammonium salt, which has not been previously evaluated as a radiostabilizer for radiodiagnostic or radiotherapeutic compounds, was added directly to the radiolabeling mixture. Surprisingly, unlike the dithiocarbamates tested in Examples 12 and 13, PDTC provided both excellent initial RCP and post-labeling stability. This result was very unexpected. Study of this compound was extended (in Example 18), where it was found that at 20 mg/mL, 100% RCP could be obtained for up to 48 hours.
  • Preparation, Labeling Efficiency Determination and Solution Stability of 177Lu-A Using 2-Ethyl-4-pyridinecarbothioamide (Ethionamide), 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt and 5-Thio-D-glucose (5 mg/mL) as Stabilizers
  • 5 mg/mL solutions of 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt (PDTC) and 5-thio-D-glucose were prepared in sodium acetate buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.8). A 5 mg/mL solution of ethionamide was prepared in 25% EtOH/NaOAc buffer. To lead-shielded 4-mL vials were added 200 μL of the individual NaOAc-stabilizer solutions, 4.65-5.64 mCi 177LuCl3 and 7.1-8.5 μg COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1 for all samples. The reaction mixtures were heated, cooled, treated with Na2EDTA.2H2O and analyzed by HPLC as described in Example 13, and then stored at room temperature for 24 hours, at which time all samples were analyzed again. The RCP data obtained are listed in Table 17.
  • TABLE 17
    RCP Data for 177Lu-A When Prepared in the Presence of 2-Ethyl-4-
    pyridinecarbothioamide (Ethionamide), 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid
    ammonium salt (PDTC) or 5-Thio-D-glucose (5 mg/mL) as Stabilizers
    COMPOUND
    mCi A RCP % RCP %
    Stabilizer (5 mg/mL) 177Lu Conc. (μg/mL) t = 0 h t = 24 h
    Ethionamide 5.45 42.5 80.8 77.5
    1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic 5.64 42.5 100 99.9
    acid ammonium salt (PDTC)
    5-Thio-D-glucose 4.65 35.5 81.3 38.0
  • The results demonstrate that PDTC does not interfere with the 177Lu-A labeling reaction and provides stability during the reaction at the 5-mg/mL concentration. In contrast, ethionamide (in 25% EtOH/NaOAc) and 5-thio-D-glucose either interfere with the labeling reaction or provide less stability during the reaction under the conditions tested. Ethionamide and PDTC are better stabilizers than 5-thio-D-glucose (as compared to their t 0 h RCP % values) during 24 hours of storage.
  • Example 16
  • Stability of 177Lu-A when Stabilized After Complex Preparation Using Cystamine dihydrochloride, L-Cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, L-Cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-Cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, L-Cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride or L-Cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate (5 mg/mL) as Stabilizers
  • In this study, sulfur-containing compounds were tested. Cysteine has been used as an antioxidant for many drugs that contain oxidizable residues. However, cysteine alone was found to interfere with radiolabeling if added directly to reaction mixtures for the preparation of 177Lu-A (Example 11), and to be partially effective if added after the 177Lu complex was formed. Surprisingly, the cysteine methyl and ethyl esters, which have not previously been reported as stabilizers in radiopharmaceuticals, provided better radiostabilization under the conditions tested.
  • Solutions of each individual stabilizer (10 mg/mL) were prepared in water. To a lead-shielded 4-mL vial was added 300 μL of NaOAc buffer (0.2M, pH 4.8), 29.6 mCi 177LuCl3 and 41.4 μg COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1. The reaction mixture was heated, cooled, treated with Na2EDTA.2H2O and analyzed by HPLC as described in Example 13. Seven 50-μL aliquots (3.34 mCi 177Lu avg each) were transferred to individual HPLC vials. To one aliquot, 50 μL of water was added for use as a control sample (no stabilizer). To the other six aliquots, 50 μL of an individual stabilizer solution (0.5 mg of stabilizer) was added, and then each was analyzed by HPLC (Method 2). The control sample, and L-cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride and L-cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride samples were analyzed again after 24 hours of storage at room temperature. The RCP data obtained are listed in Table 18.
  • TABLE 18
    RCP Data for 177Lu-A When Stabilized After Complex Preparation
    Using Cystamine dihydrochloride, L-Cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride,
    L-Cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, L-Cysteine methyl ester
    hydrochloride, L-Cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride,
    or L-Cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate (5 mg/mL) as Stabilizers
    Time of
    analysis RCP RCP
    after (%) (%)
    Stabilizer (5 mg/mL) preparation t = 0 h t = 24 h
    None (control sample)   0 hr 93.2 0 
    Cystamine dihydrochloride   1 hr 66.2
    L-cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride 1.5 hrs 91.5 73.2
    L-cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride 2.5 hrs 90.4 74.4
    L-cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride   2 hrs 61.5
    L-cysteine dimethyl ester   3 hrs 70.1
    dihydrochloride
    L-cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate 3.5 hrs 75.0
  • The results demonstrate that at the 5-mg/mL concentration, L-cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride and L-cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride provide better radiostability for 177Lu-A than do the other stabilizer solutions tested.
  • Example 17 Preparation, Labeling Efficiency Determination and Solution Stability of 177Lu-A Using L-Cysteine Ethyl Ester Hydrochloride and L-Cysteine Methyl Ester Hydrochloride (5 mg/mL) as Stabilizers
  • Solutions of L-cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride and L-cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride (5 mg/mL) were prepared by dissolving them in NaOAc buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.8). To lead-shielded 4-mL vials were added 200 μL of the individual NaOAc-stabilizer solutions, 4.80 mCi 177LuCl3 and 7.26 μg COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The ratio of COMPOUND A to Lutetium was 3:1 for all samples. The reaction mixtures were heated, cooled, treated with Na2EDTA.2H2O and analyzed by HPLC as described in Example 13, and then each was stored at room temperature for 72 hours. Each sample was analyzed by HPLC (Method 2) at t=0, 24, 48 and 72 h. The RCP data obtained are listed in Table 19.
  • TABLE 19
    RCP Data for 177Lu-A When Prepared in the Presence of L-Cysteine
    ethyl ester hydrochloride or L-Cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride
    (5 mg/mL) as Stabilizers
    RCP % RCP % RCP % RCP %
    Stabilizer (5 mg/mL) t = 0 h t = 24 h t = 48 h t = 72 h
    L-cysteine ethyl ester 100 96.5 93.5 87.4
    hydrochloride
    L-cysteine methyl ester 100 97.1 93.7 87.2
    hydrochloride
  • The results demonstrate that, at the 5-mg/mL concentration, both stabilizers provide adequate 177Lu-A stability for up to 24 hours.
  • Example 18 Preparation, Labeling Efficiency and Solution Stability of 177Lu-A Prepared in the Presence of 1-Pyrrolidine Dithiocarbamic Acid Ammonium Salt (0-20 mg/mL)
  • Solutions of 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt (PDTC) were prepared at concentrations of 20-, 10-, 5- and 1 mg/mL by dissolving it in a sodium acetate (NaOAc) buffer solution (0.2 M, pH 4.8). To lead-shielded 300-μL sample vials were added, individually, 50-μL aliquots of the PDTC-NaOAc buffer solutions, including an aliquot of the NaOAc buffer only, to serve as a control sample. To each buffer aliquot was added 9.95 mCi 177LuCl3 (avg) and 17.2 μg COMPOUND A (dissolved in water). The molar ratio of COMPOUND A:Lu (total Lu) for each sample was 3:1. During the reaction, in each sample, the concentration of COMPOUND A was 287-μg/mL and the activity concentration was 167-mCi/mL. The samples were heated to 100° C. for 5 minutes, then cooled for 5 minutes in an ambient-temperature water bath. To each sample, 10 μL of 2% EDTA in water was added, and then each was analyzed by HPLC (Method 3) over 48 hours. At t=0, the radioactivity concentration was 143 mCi/mL. The table below shows the results obtained.
  • TABLE 20
    RCP Data for 177Lu-A When Prepared in the Presence of 1-pyrrolidine
    dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt (PDTC) at 0-20 mg/mL
    RCP (%)
    PDTC Concentration 0-h 3-h 6-h 12-h 24-h 48-h
    (None - NaOAc only) Control 100 30.7 0 0
    20 mg/mL (1 mg) 100 100 100 100 100 100
    10 mg/mL (0.5 mg) 100 100 100 100 100 100
     5 mg/mL (0.25 mg) 100 100 100 100 0
     1 mg/mL (0.05 mg) 100 100 17.2 0 0
  • These results were obtained in the absence of any other stabilizer, and indicate that PDTC can provide exceptional radiostabilization. As the stabilizer was present during the labeling reaction, it indicates that a single-vial formulation using this reagent should be feasible. Additionally, this experiment demonstrates that an increased amount of stabilizer extends the duration of stability.
  • Example 19 Preparation, Labeling Efficiency and Solution Stability of 177Lu-B Prepared in the Presence of 1-Pyrrolidine Carbodithioic Acid Ammonium Salt (PDTC), Selenomethionine (Se-Met), Cysteine (Cys) or Cysteine Ethyl Ester (CEE)
  • PDTC: In this study, 177Lu-B was formulated as follows: To a 5-mL glass vial was added 5 mg of PDTC dissolved in 1 mL 0.2 M NaOAc buffer (pH 4.8), 15 μL (44 mCi) of 177LuCl3 and 30 μL of a 5 mg/mL solution of COMPOUND B in 0.01N HCl. The reaction vial was crimp-sealed and heated at 100° C. for 5 min. After cooling with a water bath, 1 mL of Bacteriostatic 0.9% NaCl, Injection containing 0.9% Benzyl Alcohol and 1 mg/mL Na2EDTA.2H2O was added. The sample was stored in an autosampler in which the temperature is ˜6° C. higher than room temperature, and analyzed by RP-HPLC for up to 24 hours. The table below shows the results obtained.
  • L-Selenomethionine: 177Lu-B was prepared, diluted and analyzed as described above, but 5 mg of L-Se-Met was used in place of PDTC, the heating time was 10 minutes, and the quantity of radioactivity used was 52 mCi.
  • L-cysteine ethyl ester, HCl: 177Lu-B was prepared, diluted and analyzed as described above, but 5 mg of L-CEE, hydrochloride salt was used in place of PDTC, the heating time was 8 minutes and the quantity of radioactivity used was 50 mCi.
  • L-cysteine.HCl.H2O: 177Lu-B was prepared, diluted and analyzed as described above, but 5 mg of L-Cys HCl.H2O was used in place of PDTC, the heating time was 8 minutes and the quantity of radioactivity used was 53 mCi.
  • TABLE 21
    RCP Data for 177Lu-B When Prepared in the Presence of PDTC, L-
    Selenomethionine, L-Cysteine ethyl ester or L-Cysteine•HCl•H2O
    (% RCP)
    177Lu-B RCP
    formulated to contain Drop
    5 mg of the following over
    stabilizing compound 0-h 3-h 6-h 9-h 12-h 24-h 24 hr
    PDTC 95.0 94.7 94.0 1
    L-Selenomethionine 95.0 94.6 94.4 93.3 92.6 90.6 4.4
    L-Cysteine ethyl 98.4 96.9 94.7 92.8 92.2 85.1 13.3
    ester•HCl
    L-Cysteine•HCl•H2O 99.1 94.7 87.3 79.4 73.6 50.9 48.2
  • These data indicate that under the conditions tested, all compounds provided some radiostabilization, when compared to historical controls with no stabilizer added, and that PDTC and L-Selenomethionine were the most efficacious of the compounds tested. The fact that PDTC could be added directly to reaction mixtures for the preparation of Lu and Indium complexes [data not shown] without inhibiting complex formation is unexpected. Compounds such as diethyl dithiocarbamate, dimethyl dithiocarbamate and others, when added to Tc formulations, have been found to form complexes (e.g., Tc NOEt) wherein the radiometal coordinates to the dithiocarbamate ligand. Likewise, several reports of Indium complexes of dithiocarbamate ligands have been published.
  • Example 20 Determination of the Effects of a Contaminant Metal (Zinc) During the Reaction of 177Lu-B with and without 1-Pyrrolidine Dithiocarbamic Acid Ammonium Salt in the Reaction Buffer
  • During the investigations with PDTC, it was found that its addition to reaction mixtures containing 177LuCl3 provided a very unexpected benefit. At times, 177LuCl3 isotope solutions are contaminated with non-radioactive metals that can interfere with radiolabeling. These metals (which may include, for example Zn, Cu, Ca and Fe among others), can compete with 177Lu for the chelator, thus lowering reaction yields by consuming ligand so it is unavailable for chelation to 177Lu. Studies of the labeling yield of 177Lu A in the presence of PDTC with and without added Zinc show clearly that addition of PDTC to reaction mixtures containing added Zn prevents interference of this contaminating metal.
  • A 10-mg/mL solution of 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt was prepared by dissolving it in sodium acetate buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.8). To a lead-shielded, 300-μL sample vial was added 86.5 μL of the NaOAc buffer solution, 13.7 mCi 177LuCl3, 0.6525 μg zinc (6.52 μL of a 100-μg/mL zinc plasma standard solution) and 15 μg COMPOUND B (dissolved in water). This was labeled as ‘Sample 1.’ To another lead-shielded, 300-μL sample vial was added 86.5 μL of the 10-μg/mL 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt/NaOAc buffer solution, 13.8 mCi 177LuCl3, 0.6525 μg zinc and 15 μg COMPOUND B. This was labeled as ‘Sample 2.’ The concentration of COMPOUND B in each sample was 150 μg/mL and the molar ratio of COMPOUND B:177Lu:Zinc for each sample was 3:1:3. The samples were heated to 100° C. for 5 min, and then cooled for 5 min in an ambient-temperature water bath. To each sample, 10 μL of 2% Na2EDTA.2H2O in water was added, and then each was analyzed by HPLC, using HPLC Method 5. FIG. 10 shows the results obtained.
  • FIG. 10A shows an HPLC chromatogram of COMPOUND B (UV), which has a retention time of 15.4 min. in the system used.
  • FIG. 10B shows a radiochromatogram (top) and UV chromatogram (bottom) of Sample 1 (control reaction; no PDTC); which was obtained following the reaction of COMPOUND B with 177Lu in the presence of zinc. The resulting RCP was 0%. The primary product formed was the zinc complex of COMPOUND B, which has a retention time of 17.3 minutes. Very little COMPOUND B remains, and very little 177Lu-B was formed.
  • FIG. 10C shows a radiochromatogram (top) and UV chromatogram (bottom) of Sample 2, which was obtained following the reaction of COMPOUND B with 177Lu in the presence of zinc and PDTC. The resulting RCP=100%.
  • The results illustrated in FIGS. 10A-10C demonstrate that 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt is effective in serving to scavenge adventitious trace metals in the reaction mixture, as radiochemical purity obtained is dramatically improved when PDTC is added to labeling reactions containing an excess of zinc.
  • Example 21 Preparation, Labeling Efficiency Determination and Solution Stability of 111In-B Using Selenomethionine (2.5 mg/mL) as Stabilizer
  • A solution of L-selenomethionine (20 mg/mL) was prepared by dissolving it in NaOAc buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.0). To a lead-shielded 2-mL vial was added 111 μL of NaOAc buffer (0.2 M, pH 4.0), 25 μL selenomethionine solution (0.5 mg of Se-Met), 4 μL of COMPOUND B (20 μg in 0.01 N HCl) and 1.0 mCi 111InCl3 in 60 μl, of 0.05 N HCl. A control reaction was run containing all reagents above, but substituting NaOAc buffer for the Se-Met solution. The reaction mixtures were heated at 100° C. for 15 minutes, and then cooled for 1 minute in an ambient-temperature water bath. To each sample, 200 μL of stabilizing solution (0.2% HSA, 5% ascorbic acid, 0.9% benzyl alcohol, 20 mM Se-Met in 50 mM citrate buffer, pH 5.3) and 2 μL of 1% Na2EDTA.2H2O in water were added, and then each was analyzed stored at room temperature for up to 6 hours and analyzed by HPLC as described below. The RCP data obtained are listed in Table 21. HPLC conditions: Vydac C18 column, 4.6×250 mm, 5 μM, 1.5 mL/min flow rate at 30° C. Solvent A: 0.1% TFA in water; Solvent B: 0.085% TFA in acetonitrile. Gradient: 80% A/20% B isocratic for 20 min, ramp up to 40% A/60% B in 5 min, hold for 5 mM, return to 80% A/20% B in 5 min.
  • TABLE 22
    RCP Data for 111In-B When Prepared in the Presence
    of Selenomethionine (2.5 mg/mL)
    RCP, %
    Stabilizer added t = 0 t = 6 h
    None (NaOAc buffer only) 94.7 93.2
    2.5 mg/mL Se-Met 98.3 96.6
  • These results demonstrate that selenomethionine can be used for radiostabilization of 111In B, as the radiochemical purity in the reaction mixture where selenomethionine was added was higher than that obtained in the control reaction without stabilizer.
  • Example 22 Preparation, Labeling Efficiency Determination and Solution Stability of 177Lu-B Using Selenomethionine and Sodium Ascorbate as Stabilizers
  • In this study, 177Lu-B was formulated as follows: To a 5-mL glass vial was added 2.94 mg of L-Selenomethionine dissolved in 1 mL of 0.2 M NaOAc buffer (pH 4.8), 25 μL (110.5 mCi) of 177LuCl3 and 30 μL of a 5 mg/mL solution of COMPOUND B in 0.01N HCl. The reaction vial was crimp-sealed and heated at 100° C. for 10 min. After the reaction vial was cooled to room temperature in a water bath, 4 mL of Bacteriostatic 0.9% NaCl, Injection containing 0.9% Benzyl Alcohol, 50 mg/mL Sodium Ascorbate and 1 mg/mL Na2EDTA.2H2O was added. The sample was stored in an autosampler in which the temperature is ˜6° C. higher than room temperature, and analyzed by RP-HPLC for up to 120 hours Table 23 below shows the results obtained.
  • TABLE 23
    RCP Data for 177Lu-B When Prepared in the Presence
    of L-Selenomethionine (2.94 mg/mL).
    Time post-reconstitution (Hours) RCP (%)
    0 99.5
    2 99.6
    3 99.5
    6 99.0
    9 99.4
    12  99.2
    24  99.4
    120 (5 days) 99.8
  • These results indicate that both excellent labeling efficiency and excellent post-reconstitution stability can be obtained using the conditions described above, namely adding 2.94 mg Se-Met to the reaction mixture during complex formation, followed by 4 mL of a saline solution containing sodium ascorbate and benzyl alcohol immediately after complex formation. There was no observed degradation over 5 days of storage at room temperature. Similar results were obtained when the quantity of selenomethionine was reduced to 1.0 mg.
  • Example 23 Determination of the Effect of Benzyl Alcohol on the Recovery of 177Lu-B
  • Two radiolysis protecting solutions were prepared as follows:
      • Stabilizer Solution A: One part 500 mg/ml L-Ascorbic acid, pH 5.7 containing 0.25 mg/ml Na2-EDTA was diluted with 9 parts of normal saline solution [no benzyl alcohol].
      • Stabilizer Solution B: One part 500 mg/ml L-Ascorbic acid, pH 5.7 containing 0.25 mg/ml Na2-EDTA was diluted with 9 parts of Bacteriostatic saline, which contained 0.9% (w/v) benzyl alcohol.
  • A 100 μL aliquot of 0.2M NaOAc buffer, pH 4.8 containing 1 mg/mL L-selenomethionine and 13 μg of Compound B was added to each of two 2-mL sample vials, designated Sample 1 and Sample 2, respectively. Approximately 10 mCi of 177LuCl3 was added to each vial and the samples were heated at 100° C. for 10 minutes in a temperature-controlled heating block. They were then removed and cooled in an ambient temperature water bath for 5 minutes. After cooling, 400 μL of Solution A was added to Sample 1, and 400 μL of Solution B was added to Sample 2.
  • Both samples were analyzed by HPLC using Method 3 and allowed to stand at room temperature for 24 hours. At the end of this time, RCP analysis was repeated, and then the entire solution was removed from each vial. The amount of radioactivity remaining in each vial and the amount of radioactivity removed were determined using a dose calibrator. The percentage of radioactivity recovered from each vial was calculated as the mCi recovered from the vial/total activity [solution and vial]×100. The results observed are shown in Table 24.
  • TABLE 24
    Comparision of RCP and % Recovery of 177Lu-B in the
    presence and absence of benzyl alcohol
    RCP (%) RCP (%) Recovery % remaining
    t = 0 t = 24 hr (%) in vial*
    Sample-01 ~100% ~100% 85.3% 14.7%
    [no benzyl alcohol]
    Sample-02 ~100% ~100% 96.7% 3.3%
    [with benzyl alcohol]
    *% of the radioactivity remaining in the glass vial, unremovable
  • These results demonstrate that the addition of benzyl alcohol to the stabilizer solution improved recovery of radioactivity from the vial significantly. This is important, as if a significant amount of the radioactivity cannot be removed from the vial, then extra radioactivity must be added to offset this loss. It is highly advantageous to have recovery be as high as possible.
  • Example 24 Evaluation of the Use of +2 Sulfur Complexes to Convert Methionine Oxide Residues to Methionyl Residues in Radiolabeled Peptides
  • Sulfur compounds, particularly thiols, in the oxidation state +2 were evaluated for the ability to convert methionine oxide residues to the reduced methionyl form. To perform this study, the methionine oxidized form of Compound B was synthesized. This oxidized compound is referred to as Compound C. Compound C was radiolabelled to form 177Lu-C, which was mixed with various +2 sulfur derivatives, stored at room temperature and analyzed over time to determine how much methionine oxide in the peptide had been converted to methionine.
  • The solutions tested were:
      • 1. 2% Mercaptoethanol [ME] in 0.1 M, pH 5.0 citrate buffer.
      • 2. 20 mg/ml L-Cysteine.HCl.H2O [Cys], in 0.1 M, pH 5.0 citrate buffer; final pH of ˜3.5.
      • 3. 20 mg/ml DL-Dithiothreitol [DTT] in 0.1 M, pH 5.0 Citrate buffer; final pH of 5.0.
      • 4. 20 mg/ml L-Methionine [Met] in 0.1 M, pH 5.0 citrate buffer.
      • 5. 20 mg/ml L-Selenomethionine [Se-Met] in 0.1 M, pH 5.0 citrate buffer.
  • Mercaptoethanol, cysteine and dithiothreitol are thiols, methionine is a thioether, and selenomethionine is an organic 2+ selenium compound. The latter two solutions were used as controls.
  • Preparation of 177Lu-C: In a 2-mL glass vial, 200 μl of 0.2 M, pH 4.8 NaOAc buffer, 30 μg Compound C [in 30 uL of 0.01 N HCl] and 5.6 mCi 177LuCl3 were added. After incubation at 85° C. for 10 min, the reaction vial was cooled to room temperature with a water bath, and then 20 μl of 2% EDTA was added to challenge any free Lu-177 that remained.
  • Sample preparation: Aliquots [40 μl, 0.75 mCi] of this reaction solution were mixed with a 100 μl aliquot of one of the solutions above, e.g., 20 mg/ml Cys; DTT; Met; Se-Met; or 2% ME. The solutions were stored at room temperature over time and analyzed by RP-HPLC at 1 and 3 days. The results obtained are shown in Table 25 below.
  • TABLE 25
    Percentage (%) of 177Lu-C converted [reduced] to 177Lu-B,
    following room temperature storage in the presence of Cys, DTT,
    ME, Met, or Se-Met for 1 to 3 days
    % Conversion
    in 1 day % Conversion in 3 days
    L-Cysteine (Cys) 5.6 12.8
    DL-Dithiothreitol (DTT) 14.1 18.9
    Mercaptoethanol (ME) 9.7 17.1
    L-Methionine (Met) 0 0
    L-Selenomethionine (Se-Met) 0 0
  • This result is significant, as it indicates that Cys, DTT and ME, all thiol-containing compounds, are capable of reducing an oxidized methionyl residue in a radiolabeled peptide back to its reduced [methionyl] form. In formulations for the preparation of 177Lu-A or 177Lu-B, it is clear that addition of Cys, DTT or ME (or other thiol) can serve to protect these compounds from oxidation by reversing any methionine oxidation that occurs.

Claims (156)

1. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a diagnostic or therapeutic radionuclide, optionally complexed to a chelator; and
(b) a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble organic compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state.
2. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 1, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
3. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 1, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
4. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
(b) an optional linking group and a targeting molecule; and
(c) a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble organic compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state.
5. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 4, wherein the linking group is a hydrocarbon linking group.
6. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 4, wherein the linking group is aminovaleric acid.
7. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound of the general formula:

M-N-Q
wherein
M is a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
N is an optional linker
and Q is a targeting molecule; and
(b) a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble organic compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state.
8. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 7, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
9. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 7, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
10. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound of the general formula:

M-N—O—P-Q
wherein
M is a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
N is 0, an alpha amino acid, a non-alpha amino acid, or other linking group;
O is an alpha amino acid, or a non-alpha amino acid;
P is 0, an alpha amino acid, a non-alpha amino acid, or other linking group; and
Q is a targeting molecule;
wherein at least one of N, O or P is a non-alpha amino acid; and
(b) a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble organic compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state.
11. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 10, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
12. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 10, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
13. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound of the general formula:

M-N—O—P-Q
wherein
M is a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
N is 0, an alpha amino acid, a substituted bile acid, or other linking group;
O is an alpha amino acid, or a substituted bile acid;
P is 0, an alpha amino acid, a substituted bile acid, or other linking group; and
Q is a targeting molecule;
wherein at least one of N, O or P is a substituted bile acid; and
(b) a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble organic compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state.
14. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 13, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
15. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 13, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
16. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 1-15, wherein the metal chelator is selected from the group consisting of DTPA, DOTA, DO3A, HP-DO3A, PA-DOTA, MeO-DOTA, MX-DTPA, EDTA, TETA, EHPG, HBED, NOTA, DOTMA, TETMA, PDTA, TTHA, LICAM, MECAM, CMDOTA, PnAO, oxa-PnAO, N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys, N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys-Gly; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; and N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly.
17. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 1-15, wherein the targeting molecule is a targeting peptide.
18. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 17, wherein the targeting peptide is selected from the group consisting of LHRH, insulin, oxytocin, somatostatin, NK-1, VIP, Substance P, NPY, endothelin A, endothelin B, bradykinin, interleukin-1, EGF, CCK, galanin, MSH, Lanreotide, Octreotide, Maltose, arginine-vasopressin and analogs and derivatives thereof.
19. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 17, wherein the targeting peptide is LHRH or an analog thereof.
20. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 17, wherein the targeting molecule is a GRP receptor targeting molecule or an analog thereof.
21. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 20, wherein the GRP receptor targeting molecule is an agonist or a peptide which confers agonist activity.
22. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 20, wherein the GRP receptor targeting molecule is bombesin or an analog thereof.
23. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 1-15, wherein the radionuclide is selected from the group consisting of 99mTC, 51Cr, 67Ga, 68Ga, 47Se, 167Tm, 141Ce, 123I, 125I, 131I, 18F, 11C, 15N, 111In, 168Yb, 175Yb, 140La, 90Y, 88Y, 86Y, 153Sm, 166Ho, 165Dy, 166Dy, 62Cu, 64Cu, 67Cu, 97Ru, 103Ru, 186Re, 188Re, 203Pb, 211Bi, 212Bi, 213Bi, 214Bi, 225Ac, 211At, 105Rh, 109Pd, 117mSn, 149Pm, 161Tb, 177Lu, 198Au and 199Au and oxides or nitrides thereof.
24. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a diagnostic or therapeutic radionuclide, optionally complexed to a chelator; and
(b) a stabilizer composition which comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, gentisic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, human serum albumin, and benzyl alcohol.
25. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
(b) an optional linking group and a targeting molecule; and
(c) a stabilizer composition which comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, gentisic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, human serum albumin, and benzyl alcohol.
26. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound of the general formula:

M-N-Q
wherein
M is a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
N is an optional linker; and
Q is a targeting molecule; and
(b) a stabilizer composition which comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof; gentisic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, human serum albumin, and benzyl alcohol.
27. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 26, wherein the linking group is a hydrocarbon linking group.
28. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 27, wherein the linking group is aminovaleric acid.
29. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound of the general formula:

M-N—O—P-Q
wherein
M is a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
N is 0, an alpha amino acid, a non-alpha amino acid, or other linking group;
O is an alpha amino acid, or a non-alpha amino acid;
P is 0, an alpha amino acid, a non-alpha amino acid, or other linking group; and
Q is a targeting molecule;
wherein at least one of N, O or P is a non-alpha amino acid; and
(b) a stabilizer composition which comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, gentisic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, human serum albumin, and benzyl alcohol.
30. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound of the general formula:

M-N—O—P-Q
wherein
M is a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
N is 0, an alpha amino acid, a substituted bile acid, or other linking group;
O is an alpha amino acid, or a substituted bile acid;
P is 0, an alpha amino acid, a substituted bile acid, or other linking group; and
Q is a targeting molecule;
wherein at least one of N, O or P is a substituted bile acid; and
(b) a stabilizer composition which comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, gentisic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, human serum albumin, and benzyl alcohol.
31. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of any of claims 24-30, wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
32. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of any of claims 24-30, wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
33. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of any of claims 24-30, wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises methionine or a derivative thereof.
34. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of any of claims 24-30, wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises cysteine or a derivative thereof.
35. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 24-35, wherein the metal chelator is selected from the group consisting of DTPA, DOTA, DO3A, HP-DO3A, PA-DOTA, MeO-DOTA, MX-DTPA, EDTA, TETA, EHPG, HBED, NOTA, DOTMA, TETMA, PDTA, TTHA, LICAM, MECAM, CMDOTA, PnAO, oxa-PnAO, N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-1-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys, N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys-Gly; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; and N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly.
36. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 24-35, wherein the targeting molecule is a targeting peptide.
37. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 36, wherein the targeting peptide is selected from the group consisting of LHRH, insulin, oxytocin, somatostatin, NK-1, VIP, Substance P, NPY, endothelin A, endothelin B, bradykinin, interleukin-1, EGF, CCK, galanan, MSH, Lanreotide, Octreotide, Maltose, arginine-vasopressin and analogs and derivatives thereof.
38. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 36, wherein the targeting peptide is LHRH or an analog thereof.
39. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 36, wherein the targeting molecule is a GRP receptor targeting molecule or an analog thereof.
40. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 36, wherein the GRP receptor targeting molecule is an agonist or a peptide which confers agonist activity.
41. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 36, wherein the GRP receptor targeting molecule is bombesin or an analog thereof.
42. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 24-41, wherein the radionuclide is selected from the group consisting of 99mTC, 51Cr, 67Ga, 68Ga, 47Sc, 167Tm, 141Ce, 123I, 125I, 131I, 18F, 11C, 15N, 111In, 168Yb, 175Yb, 140La, 90Y, 88Y, 86Y, 153Sm, 166Ho, 165Dy, 166Dy, 62Cu, 64Cu, 67Cu, 97Ru, 103Ru, 186Re, 188Re, 203Pb, 211Bi, 212Bi, 213Bi, 214Bi, 225Ac, 211At, 105Rh, 109Pd, 117mSn, 149Pm, 161Tb, 177Lu, 198Au and 199Au oxides or nitrides thereof.
43. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a diagnostic or therapeutic radionuclide, optionally complexed to a chelator; and
(b) a stabilizer comprising a dithiocarbamate compound.
44. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound comprising a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
(b) an optional linking group and a targeting molecule; and
(c) a stabilizer comprising a dithiocarbamate compound.
45. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 44, wherein the linking group is a hydrocarbon linking group.
46. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 45, wherein the linking group is aminovaleric acid.
47. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 43 or 44 wherein the dithiocarbamate compound has the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00037
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H; C1-C8 alkyl; —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl; or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is H+, Na+, K+, NH4 +, N-methylglucamine, or other pharmaceutically acceptable +1 ion.
48. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 47, wherein the stabilizer compound is selected from the group consisting of 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt, Sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate, Sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate, and combinations thereof.
49. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 48, wherein the stabilizer compound is 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt.
50. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound of the general formula:

M-N—O—P-Q
wherein
M is a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
N is 0, an alpha amino acid, a non-alpha amino acid, or other linking group;
O is an alpha amino acid, or a non-alpha amino acid;
P is 0, an alpha amino acid, a non-alpha amino acid, or other linking group; and
Q is a targeting molecule;
wherein at least one of N, O or P is a non-alpha amino acid; and
(b) a stabilizer comprising a dithiocarbamate compound.
51. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 50 wherein the dithiocarbamate compound has the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00038
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H; C1-C8 alkyl; —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl; or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is H+, Na+, K+, NH4 +, N-methylglucamine, or other pharmaceutically acceptable +1 ion.
52. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 50 wherein the dithiocarbamate compound has the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00039
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H; C1-C8 alkyl; —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl; or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is Mg2+ or Ca2+, or other physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state.
53. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 51, wherein the stabilizer compound is selected from the group consisting of 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt, Sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate, Sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate, and combinations thereof.
54. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 53, wherein the stabilizer compound is 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt.
55. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound of the general formula:

M-N—O—P-Q
wherein
M is a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
N is 0, an alpha amino acid, a substituted bile acid, or other linking group;
O is an alpha amino acid, or a substituted bile acid;
P is 0, an alpha amino acid, a substituted bile acid, or other linking group; and
Q is a targeting molecule;
wherein at least one of N, O or P is a substituted bile acid; and
(b) a stabilizer comprising a dithiocarbamate compound.
56. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 55 wherein the dithiocarbamate compound has the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00040
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H; C1-C8 alkyl; —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl; or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is H+, Na+, K+, NH4 +, N-methylglucamine, or other pharmaceutically acceptable +1 ion.
57. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 55 wherein the dithiocarbamate compound has the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00041
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H; C1-C8 alkyl; —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl; or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is Mg2+ or Ca2+, or other physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state.
58. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 55, wherein the stabilizer compound is selected from the group consisting of 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt, Sodium diethyldithiocarbamate trihydrate, Sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate, and combinations thereof.
59. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of claim 58, wherein the stabilizer compound is 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt.
60. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 43-59, wherein the metal chelator is selected from the group consisting of DTPA, DOTA, DO3A, HP-DO3A, PA-DOTA, MeO-DOTA, MX-DTPA, EDTA, TETA, EHPG, HBED, NOTA, DOTMA, TETMA, PDTA, TTHA, LICAM, MECAM, CMDOTA, PnAO, oxa-PnAO, N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys, N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys-Gly; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; and N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly.
61. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 43-59, wherein the targeting molecule is a targeting peptide.
62. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 61, wherein the targeting peptide is selected from the group consisting of LHRH, insulin, oxytocin, somatostatin, NK-1, VIP, Substance P, NPY, endothelin A, endothelin B, bradykinin, interleukin-1, EGF, CCK, galanin, MSH, Lanreotide, Octreotide, Maltose, arginine-vasopressin and analogs and derivatives thereof.
63. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 61, wherein the targeting peptide is LHRH or an analog thereof.
64. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 61, wherein the targeting molecule is a GRP receptor targeting molecule or an analog thereof.
65. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 64, wherein the GRP receptor targeting molecule is an agonist or a peptide which confers agonist activity.
66. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 64, wherein the GRP receptor targeting molecule is bombesin or an analog thereof.
67. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 43-59, wherein the radionuclide is selected from the group consisting of 99mTc, 51Cr, 67Ga, 68Ga, 47Sc, 167Tm, 141Ce, 123I, 125I, 131I, 18F, 11C, 15N, 111In, 168Yb, 175Yb, 140La, 90Y, 88Y, 86Y, 153Sm, 166Ho, 165Dy, 166Dy, 62Cu, 67Cu, 97Ru, 103Ru, 186Re, 188Re, 203Pb, 211Bi, 212Bi, 213Bi, 214Bi, 225Ac, 211At, 105Rh, 109Pd, 117mSn, 149Pm, 161Tb, 177Lu, 198Au and 199Au and oxides or nitrides thereof.
68. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a diagnostic or therapeutic radionuclide, optionally complexed to a chelator; and
(b) a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble compound containing sulfur in the +2 oxidation state.
69. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
(b) an optional linking group and a targeting molecule; and
(c) a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble compound containing sulfur in the +2 oxidation state.
70. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 69, wherein the linking group is a hydrocarbon linking group.
71. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 70, wherein the linking group is aminovaleric acid.
72. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 69, wherein the stabilizer comprises cysteine or a derivative thereof, mercaptoethanol, or dithiolthreitol, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
73. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 72, wherein the stabilizer comprises a cysteine derivative selected from the group consisting of cystamine dihydrochloride, cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate, 5-thio-d-glucose, reduced 1-glutathione, and combinations thereof.
74. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound of the general formula:

M-N—O—P-Q
wherein
M is a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
N is 0, an alpha amino acid, a non-alpha amino acid, or other linking group;
O is an alpha amino acid, or a non-alpha amino acid;
P is 0, an alpha amino acid, a non-alpha amino acid, or other linking group; and
Q is a targeting molecule;
wherein at least one of N, O or P is a non-alpha amino acid; and
(b) a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble compound containing sulfur in the +2 oxidation state.
75. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 74, wherein the stabilizer comprises cysteine or a derivative thereof, mercaptoethanol, or dithiolthreitol, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
76. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 75, wherein the stabilizer comprises a cysteine derivative selected from the group consisting of cystamine dihydrochloride, cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate, 5-thio-d-glucose, reduced 1-glutathione, and combinations thereof.
77. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a compound of the general formula:

M-N—O—P-Q
wherein
M is a metal chelator complexed with a radionuclide;
N is 0, an alpha amino acid, a substituted bile acid, or other linking group;
O is an alpha amino acid, or a substituted bile acid;
P is 0, an alpha amino acid, a substituted bile acid, or other linking group; and
Q is a targeting molecule;
wherein at least one of N, O or P is a substituted bile acid; and
(b) a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble compound containing sulfur in the +2 oxidation state.
78. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 77, wherein the stabilizer comprises cysteine or a derivative thereof, mercaptoethanol, or dithiolthreitol, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
79. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 78, wherein the stabilizer comprises a cysteine derivative selected from the group consisting of cystamine dihydrochloride, cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate, 5-thio-d-glucose, reduced 1-glutathione, and combinations thereof.
80. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 68-79, wherein the metal chelator is selected from the group consisting of DTPA, DOTA, DO3A, HP-DO3A, PA-DOTA, MeO-DOTA, MX-DTPA, EDTA, TETA, EHPG, HBED, NOTA, DOTMA, TETMA, PDTA, TTHA, LICAM, MECAM, CMDOTA, PnAO, oxa-PnAO, N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys; N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys, N,N-dimethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; N,N-dimethylGly-Thr-Cys-Gly; N,N-diethylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly; and N,N-dibenzylGly-Ser-Cys-Gly.
81. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 68-79 wherein the targeting molecule is a targeting peptide.
82. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 81, wherein the targeting peptide is selected from the group consisting of LHRH, insulin, oxytocin, somatostatin, NK-1, VIP, Substance P, NPY, endothelin A, endothelin B, bradykinin, interleukin-1, EGF, CCK, galanin, MSH, Lanreotide, Octreotide, Maltose, arginine-vasopressin and analogs and derivatives thereof.
83. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 81, wherein the targeting peptide is LHRH or an analog thereof.
84. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 81, wherein the targeting molecule is a GRP receptor targeting molecule or an analog thereof.
85. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 82, wherein the GRP receptor targeting molecule is an agonist or a peptide which confers agonist activity.
86. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 82, wherein the GRP receptor targeting molecule is bombesin or an analog thereof.
87. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claims 73-87, wherein the radionuclide is selected from the group consisting of 99mTc, 51Cr, 67Ga, 68Ga, 47Se, 167Tm, 141Ce, 123I, 125I, 131I, 18F, 11C, 15N, 111In, 168Yb, 175Yb, 140La, 90Y, 88Y, 86Y, 153Sm, 166Ho, 165Dy, 166Dy, 62Cu, 64Cu, 67Cu, 97Ru, 103Ru, 186Re, 188Re, 203Pb, 211Bi, 212Bi, 213Bi, 214Bi, 225Ac, 211At, 105Rh, 109Pd, 117mSn, 149Pm, 161Tb, 177Lu, 198Au and 199Au and oxides or nitrides thereof.
88. A method for stabilizing a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) combining a radionuclide with a chelator so as to form a radiolabelled complex; and
(b) combining the complex with a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble organic compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state.
89. A method of claim 88, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
90. A method of claim 88, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
91. A method for stabilizing a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) combining a radionuclide with a chelator so as to form a radiolabelled complex; and
(b) combining the complex with a stabilizer composition which comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof; gentisic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, human serum albumin, and benzyl alcohol.
92. A method of embodiment 91 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
93. A method of claim 91 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
94. A method of claim 91 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises methionine or a derivative thereof.
95. A method of claim 91 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises cysteine or a derivative thereof.
96. A method for stabilizing a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) combining a radionuclide with a chelator so as to form a radiolabelled complex; and
(b) combining the complex with a stabilizer comprising a dithiocarbamate compound.
97. A method of claim 96 wherein the dithiocarbamate compound has the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00042
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H, C1-C8 alkyl, —OR3 wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl, or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is H+, Na+, K+, NH4 + or other pharmaceutically acceptable +1 ion.
98. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 96 wherein the dithiocarbamate compound has the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00043
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H; C1-C8 alkyl; —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl; or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is Mg2+ or Ca2+, or other physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state.
99. A method of claim 97, wherein the stabilizer compound is selected from the group consisting of 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt, sodium diethyldithiocarbarnate trihydrate and sodium dimethyldithiocarbamate hydrate, and combinations thereof.
100. A method for stabilizing a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) combining a radionuclide with a chelator so as to form a radiolabelled complex; and
(b) combining the complex with a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble compound containing sulfur in the +2 oxidation state.
101. A method of claim 100, wherein the stabilizer comprises cysteine or a derivative thereof, mercaptoethanol, or dithiolthreitol, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
102. A method of claim 101, wherein the stabilizer comprises a cysteine derivative selected from the group consisting of cystamine dihydrochloride, cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate, 5-thio-d-glucose, reduced 1-glutathione, and combinations thereof.
103. A method for stabilizing a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising simultaneously reacting a radionuclide with a chelator and with a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble compound containing sulfur in the +2 oxidation state.
104. A method of claim 103, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
105. A method of claim 103, wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
106. A method for stabilizing a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising simultaneously reacting a radionuclide with a chelator and with a stabilizer composition which comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, gentisic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof; human serum albumin, and benzyl alcohol.
107. A method of claim 106 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
108. A method of claim 106 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
109. A method of claim 106 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises methionine or a derivative thereof.
110. A method of claim 106 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises cysteine or a derivative thereof.
111. A method for stabilizing a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising simultaneously reacting a radionuclide with a chelator and with a stabilizer comprising a dithiocarbamate compound.
112. A method of claim 111 wherein the dithiocarbamate compound has the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00044
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H, C1-C8 alkyl, —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl, or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is H+, Na+, K+, NH4 + or other pharmaceutically acceptable +1 ion.
113. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition of claim 111 wherein the dithiocarbamate compound has the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00045
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H; C1-C8 alkyl; —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl; or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is Mg2+ or Ca2+, or other physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state.
114. A method of claim 112, wherein the stabilizer compound is 1-pyrrolidine dithiocarbamic acid ammonium salt.
115. A method for stabilizing a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising simultaneously reacting a radionuclide with a chelator and with a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble compound containing sulfur in the +2 oxidation state.
116. A method of claim 115, wherein the stabilizer comprises cysteine or a derivative thereof, mercaptoethanol, or dithiolthreitol, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
117. A method of claim 116, wherein the stabilizer comprises a cysteine derivative selected from the group consisting of cystamine dihydrochloride, cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate, 5-thio-d-glucose, reduced 1-glutathione, and combinations thereof.
118. A kit for the preparation of a stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a first reagent which comprises a diagnostic or therapeutic radionuclide, optionally complexed to a chelator; and
(b) a second reagent which comprises a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble organic compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state.
119. A kit of claim 118 wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
120. A kit of claim 118 wherein the water-soluble compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
121. A kit for the preparation of a stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a first reagent which comprises a diagnostic or therapeutic radionuclide, optionally complexed to a chelator; and
(b) a second reagent which comprises a stabilizer composition which comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, gentisic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, human serum albumin, and benzyl alcohol.
122. A kit of claim 121 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises selenomethionine or a derivative thereof.
123. A kit of claim 121 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises selenocysteine or a derivative thereof.
124. A kit of claim 121 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises methionine or a derivative thereof.
125. A kit of claim 121 wherein the stabilizer composition further comprises cysteine or a derivative thereof.
126. A kit for the preparation of a stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a first reagent which comprises a diagnostic or therapeutic radionuclide, optionally complexed to a chelator; and
(b) a second reagent which comprises a stabilizer comprising a dithiocarbamate compound.
127. A kit of claim 126 wherein the dithiocarbamate compound has the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00046
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H, C1-C8 alkyl, —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl, or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is H+, Na+, K+, NH4 + or other pharmaceutically acceptable +1 ion;
or
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00047
wherein R1 and R2 are each independently H; C1-C8 alkyl; —OR3, wherein R3 is C1-C8 alkyl; or benzyl, either unsubstituted or optionally substituted with water solubilizing groups; or
wherein R1, R2, and N combined form 1-pyrrolidinyl-, piperidino-, morpholino-, 1-piperazinyl-; and M is Mg2+ or Ca2+, or other physiologically acceptable metal in the +2 oxidation state.
128. A kit for the preparation of a stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a first reagent which comprises a diagnostic or therapeutic radionuclide, optionally complexed to a chelator; and
(b) a second reagent which comprises a stabilizer comprising a water-soluble compound containing sulfur in the +2 oxidation state.
129. A kit of claim 128 wherein the stabilizer comprises cysteine or a derivative thereof, mercaptoethanol, or dithiolthreitol, or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
130. A kit of claim 129 wherein the stabilizer comprises a cysteine derivative selected from the group consisting of cystamine dihydrochloride, cysteine hydrochloride monohydrate, cysteine ethyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine diethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteine methyl ester hydrochloride, cysteine dimethyl ester dihydrochloride, cysteinesulfinic acid monohydrate, 5-thio-d-glucose, reduced 1-glutathione, and combinations thereof.
131. A kit for the preparation of a stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a first reagent which comprises a diagnostic or therapeutic radionuclide, optionally complexed to a chelator; and
(b) a second reagent which comprises a stabilizer comprising a comprising a water-soluble compound containing sulfur in the +2 oxidation state.
132. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00048
and a stabilizing composition comprising Ascorbic Acid, Gentisic acid, Human Serum Albumin, Benzyl Alcohol, and an amino acid selected from the group consisting of cysteine, methionine, or Selenomethionine.
133. A stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00049
and a stabilizing composition comprising Ascorbic Acid, Gentisic acid, Human Serum Albumin, Benzyl Alcohol, and an amino acid selected from the group consisting of cysteine, methionine, or Selenomethionine.
134. A kit for the preparation of a stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a first reagent which comprises a compound of the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00050
and a water-soluble organic compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state; and
(b) a second reagent which comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, sodium chloride, EDTA, and benzyl alcohol.
135. A kit of claim 134, wherein the compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenomethionine.
136. A kit of claim 135, wherein the first reagent further comprises a radionuclide.
137. A kit of claim 136, wherein the radionuclide is selected from the group consisting of 177Lu, 111In, and 90Y.
138. A kit of claim 137, wherein the radionuclide is 177Lu.
139. A kit for the preparation of a stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) a first reagent which comprises a compound of the formula:
Figure US20110206606A1-20110825-C00051
and a water-soluble organic compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state; and
(b) a second reagent which comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically salt thereof, sodium chloride, EDTA, and benzyl alcohol.
140. A kit of claim 139, wherein the compound containing selenium in the +2 oxidation state is selenomethionine.
141. A kit of claim 140, wherein the first reagent further comprises a radionuclide.
142. A kit of claim 141, wherein the radionuclide is selected from the group consisting of 177Lu, 111In, and 90Y.
143. A kit of claim 137, wherein the radionuclide is 177Lu.
144. A method of increasing recovery of radioactivity from a reaction that produces a radiopharmaceutical composition, comprising adding benzyl alcohol to a reaction mixture that produces the radiopharmaceutical composition.
145. A method of increasing recovery of radioactivity from a reaction that produces a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising:
(a) reacting a radionuclide with a chelator to form a radiolabeled chelate;
(b) reacting the radiolabeled chelate with a stabilizer solution comprising benzyl alcohol.
146. A method of claim 145, wherein the stabilizer solution further comprises ascorbic acid or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
147. A method of claim 145, wherein the stabilizer solution further comprises EDTA.
148. A method of reducing one or more oxidized methionine residues in a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising reacting the radiopharmaceutical composition with cysteine.
149. A method of reducing one or more oxidized methionine residues in a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising reacting the radiopharmaceutical composition with dithiolthreitol.
150. A method of reducing one or more oxidized methionine residues in a radiopharmaceutical composition comprising reacting the radiopharmaceutical composition with mercaptoethanol.
151. A method of any of claims 148-150, wherein the radiopharmaceutical composition comprises a compound having the formula of Compound A.
152. A method of any of claims 148-150, wherein the radiopharmaceutical composition comprises a compound having the formula of Compound B.
153. A method of reducing interference from metallic contaminants in a reaction mixture for the preparation of a radiopharmaceutical comprising reacting the mixture with a dithiocarbamate.
154. The method of claim 153, wherein the dithiocarbamate is PDTC.
155. A method of improving yield of a desired radiopharmaceutical, comprising adding a dithiocarbamate to the reaction mixture that produces the radiopharmaceutical.
156. The method of claim 155, wherein the dithiocarbamate is PDTC.
US12/975,087 2003-07-24 2010-12-21 Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation Abandoned US20110206606A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US12/975,087 US20110206606A1 (en) 2003-07-24 2010-12-21 Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US48985003P 2003-07-24 2003-07-24
PCT/US2004/023930 WO2005009393A2 (en) 2003-07-24 2004-07-23 Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation
US56611207A 2007-07-09 2007-07-09
US12/975,087 US20110206606A1 (en) 2003-07-24 2010-12-21 Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2004/023930 Division WO2005009393A2 (en) 2003-07-24 2004-07-23 Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation
US56611207A Division 2003-07-24 2007-07-09

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20110206606A1 true US20110206606A1 (en) 2011-08-25

Family

ID=34102942

Family Applications (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/566,112 Abandoned US20070269375A1 (en) 2003-07-24 2004-07-23 Stable Radiopharmaceutical Compositions and Methods for Preparation
US12/975,087 Abandoned US20110206606A1 (en) 2003-07-24 2010-12-21 Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation
US13/280,485 Abandoned US20120065365A1 (en) 2003-07-24 2011-10-25 Stable Radiopharmaceutical Compositions and Methods for Their Preparation

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/566,112 Abandoned US20070269375A1 (en) 2003-07-24 2004-07-23 Stable Radiopharmaceutical Compositions and Methods for Preparation

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/280,485 Abandoned US20120065365A1 (en) 2003-07-24 2011-10-25 Stable Radiopharmaceutical Compositions and Methods for Their Preparation

Country Status (13)

Country Link
US (3) US20070269375A1 (en)
EP (1) EP1654005A4 (en)
JP (2) JP5139678B2 (en)
KR (1) KR101106533B1 (en)
CN (1) CN100418585C (en)
AU (1) AU2004259028C1 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0412824A (en)
CA (2) CA2783275A1 (en)
IL (1) IL172059A0 (en)
RU (1) RU2006105644A (en)
SG (2) SG177216A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2005009393A2 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200509666B (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110250107A1 (en) * 2010-04-07 2011-10-13 Jennifer Varnedoe Column geometry to maximize elution efficiencies for molybdenum-99
WO2022251516A3 (en) * 2021-05-26 2023-01-26 Cornell University Complexes with acyclic chelators and their use in targeted radiotherapy of cancer

Families Citing this family (75)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7344702B2 (en) 2004-02-13 2008-03-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Contrast agents for myocardial perfusion imaging
US7611692B2 (en) 2003-01-13 2009-11-03 Bracco Imaging S.P.A. Gastrin releasing peptide compounds
US8420050B2 (en) 2003-01-13 2013-04-16 Bracco Imaging S.P.A. Gastrin releasing peptide compounds
US7922998B2 (en) * 2003-01-13 2011-04-12 Bracco Imaging S.P.A. Gastrin releasing peptide compounds
US7226577B2 (en) 2003-01-13 2007-06-05 Bracco Imaging, S. P. A. Gastrin releasing peptide compounds
US7850947B2 (en) 2003-01-13 2010-12-14 Bracco Imaging S.P.A. Gastrin releasing peptide compounds
WO2007008232A2 (en) * 2004-09-03 2007-01-18 Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System Locoregional internal radionuclide ablation of abnormal tissues.
GB0514087D0 (en) 2005-07-11 2005-08-17 Ge Healthcare Ltd Stabilised radiopharmaceutical compositions
US8986650B2 (en) 2005-10-07 2015-03-24 Guerbet Complex folate-NOTA-Ga68
EP1940841B9 (en) 2005-10-07 2017-04-19 Guerbet Compounds comprising a biological target recognizing part, coupled to a signal part capable of complexing gallium
FR2891830B1 (en) 2005-10-07 2011-06-24 Guerbet Sa SHORT AMINOALCOHOL COMPOUNDS AND METAL COMPLEXES FOR MEDICAL IMAGING
US20100056826A1 (en) * 2006-11-09 2010-03-04 Nihon Medi-Physicis Co., Ltd. Radioactive diagnostic imaging agent
AU2007343610C1 (en) * 2007-01-17 2013-11-07 Immunomedics, Inc. Polymeric carriers of therapeutic agents and recognition moieties for antibody-based targeting of disease sites
EP2170268A2 (en) 2007-06-25 2010-04-07 Amgen, Inc. Compositions of specific binding agents to hepatocyte growth factor
US20100254902A1 (en) * 2007-11-07 2010-10-07 Jan Van Den Bos Stabilization of radiopharmaceuticals
CA2967254C (en) 2008-02-29 2019-03-26 Lantheus Medical Imaging, Inc. Contrast agents for applications including imaging cancer
EP2100900A1 (en) * 2008-03-07 2009-09-16 Universitätsspital Basel Bombesin analog peptide antagonist conjugates
FR2942227B1 (en) 2009-02-13 2011-04-15 Guerbet Sa USE OF BUFFERS FOR RADIONUCLEID COMPLEXATION
US20120045393A1 (en) 2009-03-17 2012-02-23 Linder Karen E Lhrh-ii peptide analogs
WO2010121133A2 (en) 2009-04-17 2010-10-21 The General Hospital Corporation Multimodal imaging of fibrin
CN102356087A (en) 2009-03-19 2012-02-15 惠氏有限责任公司 Methods for preparation of [2-(8,9-dioxo-2,6-diazabicyclo[5.2.0]non-1(7)-en-2-yl)ethyl]phosphonic acid and precursors thereof
CN102458396B (en) 2009-04-15 2017-05-10 兰休斯医疗成像公司 Stabilization of radiopharmaceutical compositions using ascorbic acid
WO2011066521A2 (en) 2009-11-30 2011-06-03 Stc. Unm Compounds with reduced ring size for use in diagnosing and treating melanoma, including metastatic melanoma and methods related to same
EP2518086A1 (en) * 2009-12-25 2012-10-31 Riken Radiolabeled compound directable in vivo to target tissue and use thereof
CN109200296B (en) 2010-02-08 2021-12-14 兰休斯医疗成像公司 Method and apparatus for synthesizing imaging agents and intermediates thereof
CN101786990B (en) * 2010-03-04 2012-01-18 合肥工业大学 Compound having anti-itching activity
DE102010026052A1 (en) * 2010-06-30 2012-01-05 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft 11C-labeled peptide for the detection of a diseased tissue expressing an IGF receptor
DE102010026065A1 (en) * 2010-06-30 2012-01-05 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft 11C-labeled peptide for detection of a tumor expressing a bombesin receptor
DE102010026060A1 (en) * 2010-06-30 2012-01-05 Siemens Aktiengesellschaft 11C-labeled peptide for detection of a tumor expressing a somatostatin receptor
EP2603243B1 (en) 2010-08-13 2020-02-19 Siemens Medical Solutions USA, Inc. Formulation, apparatus and method for stabilizing radiopharmaceuticals
ITFI20110180A1 (en) 2011-08-12 2013-02-13 Advanced Accelerator Applic S A PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF COMPLEXES OF 68GA.
US11534494B2 (en) 2011-12-21 2022-12-27 Ge Healthcare Limited Formulation and method of synthesis
ES2671622T3 (en) * 2011-12-21 2018-06-07 Iso Therapeutics Group Llc Compositions and radioactive methods for therapeutic use
AU2012356846B2 (en) * 2011-12-21 2017-07-27 Ge Healthcare Limited 18F - Fluciclovine compositions in citrate buffers
GB201411569D0 (en) 2014-06-30 2014-08-13 Ge Healthcare Ltd Novel formulation and method of synthesis
CN102552949B (en) * 2012-02-21 2013-07-10 安徽筑梦生物科技有限公司 99mTc-labeled RGD (Arginine-Glycine-Aspartic acid) polypeptide tumor diagnosis medicament and preparation method thereof
AU2013203000B9 (en) 2012-08-10 2017-02-02 Lantheus Medical Imaging, Inc. Compositions, methods, and systems for the synthesis and use of imaging agents
CA2923980C (en) * 2012-09-13 2020-03-10 British Columbia Cancer Agency Branch Compositions targeting bradykinin receptor b1 for medical imaging of cancer and other disorders
ES2745635T3 (en) * 2012-09-25 2020-03-03 Advanced Accelerator Applications Usa Inc GRPR antagonists for the detection, diagnosis and treatment of GRPR positive cancer
RU2528414C1 (en) * 2013-01-25 2014-09-20 Закрытое Акционерное Общество "Фарм-Синтез" Cyclic octapeptide, radiopharmaceutical agent based thereon and method of using radiopharmaceutical agent to produce medicinal (pharmaceutical) agents for treating neoplasms expressing somatostatin receptors
CA2907082C (en) 2013-03-15 2021-05-04 Brigham Young University Methods for treating inflammation, autoimmune disorders and pain
US11524015B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2022-12-13 Brigham Young University Methods for treating inflammation, autoimmune disorders and pain
EP2821383B1 (en) * 2013-07-02 2017-08-30 Trasis S.A. Stabilization of radiosynthetic intermediates
JP6410339B2 (en) * 2013-03-25 2018-10-24 国立大学法人千葉大学 Radionuclide labeled octreotide derivatives
US11690855B2 (en) 2013-10-17 2023-07-04 Brigham Young University Methods for treating lung infections and inflammation
US20150203527A1 (en) 2014-01-23 2015-07-23 Brigham Young University Cationic steroidal antimicrobials
KR101523249B1 (en) 2014-05-22 2015-05-27 서울대학교산학협력단 Method for labelling exosome with radioisotope and its use
KR101658201B1 (en) * 2014-06-16 2016-09-22 한국원자력연구원 GRP-R agonistic 177-Lutetium-labeled bombesin analogue for diagnosis and treatment of prostate cancer
US10227376B2 (en) * 2014-08-22 2019-03-12 Brigham Young University Radiolabeled cationic steroid antimicrobials and diagnostic methods
BE1021191B1 (en) 2014-08-29 2015-10-27 Anmi S.A. KIT FOR RADIOMARKING.
US11027030B2 (en) 2014-08-29 2021-06-08 Anmi S.A. Kit for radiolabelling
JP6527736B2 (en) * 2015-03-30 2019-06-05 富士フイルム富山化学株式会社 Radiopharmaceutical composition
US10226550B2 (en) 2016-03-11 2019-03-12 Brigham Young University Cationic steroidal antimicrobial compositions for the treatment of dermal tissue
US10758634B2 (en) 2016-03-18 2020-09-01 Wake Forest University Compounds, compositions and associated methods using zirconium-89 in immuno-positron emission tomography
US10959433B2 (en) 2017-03-21 2021-03-30 Brigham Young University Use of cationic steroidal antimicrobials for sporicidal activity
BR112019023249A8 (en) * 2017-05-05 2021-02-23 Centre For Probe Dev And Commercialization igf-1r monoclonal antibodies and their uses
DK3459526T3 (en) * 2017-09-26 2021-05-25 Palacky Univ In Olomouc BIOTA AVAILABLE DITHIOCARBAMATE METAL COMPLEX NANOPARTICLES, MANUFACTURING METHOD AND USE
US20210046197A1 (en) * 2018-01-26 2021-02-18 Wake Forest University Kit technology for the production and long-term storage of zr-89-pet radiopharmaceuticals
WO2019195890A1 (en) 2018-04-11 2019-10-17 Clarity Pharmaceuticals Pty Ltd Formulations and kits for radiotherapy and diagnostic imaging
US10596276B2 (en) 2018-07-25 2020-03-24 Advanced Accelerator Applications (Italy) S.R.L. Stable, concentrated radionuclide complex solutions
US10596278B2 (en) * 2018-07-25 2020-03-24 Advanced Accelerator Applications (Italy) S.R.L. Stable, concentrated radionuclide complex solutions
AU2018433575B2 (en) * 2018-07-25 2022-07-07 Advanced Accelerator Applications Sa Stable, concentrated radionuclide complex solutions
WO2020021310A1 (en) * 2018-07-25 2020-01-30 Advanced Accelerator Applications (Italy) Srl Stable, concentrated radionuclide complex solutions
CN113766952B (en) * 2019-03-29 2023-09-08 国立研究开发法人量子科学技术研究开发机构 Method for producing radiopharmaceutical and radiopharmaceutical
TW202123976A (en) * 2019-09-16 2021-07-01 義大利商先進艾斯雷特應用(義大利)公司 Stable, concentrated radiopharmaceutical composition
TW202123975A (en) * 2019-09-17 2021-07-01 義大利商先進艾斯雷特應用(義大利)公司 Methods for radiolabelling grpr antagonists and their kits
KR102207372B1 (en) * 2020-03-31 2021-01-27 재단법인 아산사회복지재단 Stabilizer for Radiopharmaceuticals and Radiopharmaceutical composition comprising the same
US11129912B1 (en) * 2020-07-13 2021-09-28 POINT Biopharma Inc. Radiopharmaceutical and methods
BR112023000763A2 (en) 2020-07-13 2023-03-21 Point Biopharma Inc PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION, METHOD FOR PREPARING 177LU-PSMA I&T, METHOD FOR TREATMENT OF A PATIENT, COMPLEX, METHOD FOR TREATMENT OF AN INDIVIDUAL
CN116528904A (en) 2020-08-27 2023-08-01 普罗博开发商业中心 Radiopharmaceuticals and methods
CN112546247A (en) * 2020-12-03 2021-03-26 西南医科大学附属医院 Application of polyhydroxy phenol compound, radiopharmaceutical composition and preparation method
WO2022156907A1 (en) 2021-01-25 2022-07-28 Vrije Universiteit Brussel Method and kit for labeling a biomolecule with one or more detectable labels, including a radiolabel
CN112999369B (en) * 2021-03-03 2022-02-25 江苏元本生物科技有限公司 HER2 affinity radionuclide marker composition and application thereof
WO2023100852A1 (en) * 2021-11-30 2023-06-08 日本メジフィジックス株式会社 Stabilized radiopharmaceutical composition
CN115015441B (en) * 2022-07-14 2023-08-18 原子高科股份有限公司 Determination of lutetium 177 Lu]Method for stabilizing content of octreotide injection

Citations (56)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US441184A (en) * 1890-11-25 Car-coupling
US4075314A (en) * 1976-04-29 1978-02-21 Mallinckrodt, Inc. Stannous pyrophosphate technetium-99m compositions
US4232000A (en) * 1978-06-28 1980-11-04 The Procter & Gamble Company Radioactive scanning agents with stabilizer
US4364920A (en) * 1975-04-30 1982-12-21 Medi-Physics, Inc. Stable diagnostic reagents
US4390517A (en) * 1979-12-19 1983-06-28 New England Nuclear Corporation Method, composition and kit for stabilizing radiolabeled compounds
US4411881A (en) * 1982-07-12 1983-10-25 New England Nuclear Corporation Composition and method for stabilizing radiolabeled compounds using thiocarbonylated diethylenetriamines
US4416865A (en) * 1973-02-20 1983-11-22 Research Corporation Radiopharmaceuticals for localization of thromboembolic disease
US4440738A (en) * 1982-06-10 1984-04-03 Mallinckrodt, Inc. Stable radiographic imaging agents
US4451451A (en) * 1981-10-30 1984-05-29 Amersham International Plc Radiopharmaceutical composition based on technetium-99m and reagent for making it
US4510125A (en) * 1982-12-08 1985-04-09 Mallinckrodt, Inc. Process for making lyophilized radiographic imaging kit
US4619823A (en) * 1983-09-09 1986-10-28 Nihon Medi-Physics Co., Ltd. Radioactive iodine labeled metaraminol and diagnostic agent containing platelets labeled therewith
US4645660A (en) * 1983-04-26 1987-02-24 Nihon Medi-Physics Co., Ltd. Increasing labeling efficiency by forming diagnostic agent in the presence of ascorbic acid or the like
US4647447A (en) * 1981-07-24 1987-03-03 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Diagnostic media
US4652440A (en) * 1984-05-03 1987-03-24 Paik Chang H Method of stably radiolabeling antibodies with technetium and rhenium
US4707353A (en) * 1982-12-08 1987-11-17 Mallinckrodt, Inc. Radiographic imaging agents
US4793987A (en) * 1985-04-26 1988-12-27 Amersham International Plc Stabilized radiolabelled compounds
US4808705A (en) * 1986-12-19 1989-02-28 Cetus Corporation Stable formulations of ricin toxin a chain and of RTA-immunoconjugates and stabilizer screening methods therefor
US4885363A (en) * 1987-04-24 1989-12-05 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. 1-substituted-1,4,7-triscarboxymethyl-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane and analogs
US4899755A (en) * 1985-05-08 1990-02-13 The General Hospital Corporation Hepatobiliary NMR contrast agents
US4935222A (en) * 1986-06-13 1990-06-19 University Of Cincinnati Procedure for isolating and purifying radioactive ligated rhenium pharmaceuticals and use thereof and kit
US4957939A (en) * 1981-07-24 1990-09-18 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Sterile pharmaceutical compositions of gadolinium chelates useful enhancing NMR imaging
US5021556A (en) * 1987-07-22 1991-06-04 Neorx Corporation Method of radiolabeling chelating compounds comprising sulfur atoms with metal radionuclides
US5053493A (en) * 1987-04-02 1991-10-01 Centocor Cardiovascular Imaging Partners, L.P. Method for labeling antibodies with a metal ion
US5075099A (en) * 1988-05-31 1991-12-24 Neorx Corporation Metal radionuclide chelating compounds for improved chelation kinetics
US5093105A (en) * 1991-04-09 1992-03-03 Merck Frosst Canada, Inc. Radiopharmaceutical bacteriostats
US5118797A (en) * 1989-08-28 1992-06-02 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Rhenium tris dioxime complexes
US5128119A (en) * 1989-06-12 1992-07-07 Immunomedics, Inc. Methods for technetium/rhenium labeling of f(ab1)2 fragments
US5169993A (en) * 1990-09-03 1992-12-08 Shell Research Limited Cyclohexenol derivatives
US5183653A (en) * 1990-04-13 1993-02-02 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Boronic acid adducts of metal dioxime complexes useful in labelling proteins and other amine-containing compounds
US5219556A (en) * 1990-07-09 1993-06-15 Mallinckrodt Medical, Inc. Stabilized therapeutic radiopharmaceutical complexes
US5245018A (en) * 1990-10-31 1993-09-14 Nihon Medi-Physics Co., Ltd. Process for preparing a radiopharmaceutical composition
US5262175A (en) * 1989-05-10 1993-11-16 Solanki Kishor K Stabilization of radiopharmaceutical compositions
US5306482A (en) * 1991-04-09 1994-04-26 Merck Frosst Canada, Inc. Radiopharmaceutical bacteriostats
US5362473A (en) * 1988-10-14 1994-11-08 Mallinckrodt Medical, Inc. Radiolabelled particulate composition
US5364613A (en) * 1989-04-07 1994-11-15 Sieving Paul F Polychelants containing macrocyclic chelant moieties
US5367080A (en) * 1990-11-08 1994-11-22 Sterling Winthrop Inc. Complexing agents and targeting radioactive immunoreagents useful in therapeutic and diagnostic imaging compositions and methods
US5384113A (en) * 1991-08-29 1995-01-24 Mallinckrodt Medical, Inc. Stabilizers to prevent autoradiolysis of radiolabeled peptides and proteins
US5387409A (en) * 1990-01-18 1995-02-07 Bracco International B.V. Boronic acid adducts of rhenium dioxime and technetium-99m dioxime complexes containing a biochemically active group
US5393512A (en) * 1985-01-14 1995-02-28 Vanderheyden; Jean-Luc Stable therapeutic radionuclide compositions and methods for preparation thereof
US5474756A (en) * 1986-01-23 1995-12-12 Bracco International B.V. Method for imaging mammalian tissue using 1-substituted-1,4,7-tricarboxymethyl-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane and analogs
US5608110A (en) * 1993-06-15 1997-03-04 Bracco International B.V. Heteroatom-bearing ligands and metal complexes thereof
US5662885A (en) * 1994-07-22 1997-09-02 Resolution Pharmaceuticals Inc. Peptide derived radionuclide chelators
US5688487A (en) * 1991-10-29 1997-11-18 Bracco International B.V. Diagnostic imaging methods using rhenium and technetium complexes containing a hypoxia-localizing moiety
US5720934A (en) * 1992-04-30 1998-02-24 Diatide, Inc. Technetium-99M labeled peptides for imaging
US5886142A (en) * 1997-05-20 1999-03-23 Thomas Jefferson University Radiolabeled thrombus imaging agents
US5919820A (en) * 1996-05-02 1999-07-06 Pharma Nord Aps Antioxidant medicament
US6027710A (en) * 1996-09-18 2000-02-22 Nihon Medi-Physiscs Co., Ltd. Radiation-protecting agent
US6066309A (en) * 1996-02-02 2000-05-23 Rhomed Incorporated Post-labeling stabilization of radiolabeled proteins and peptides
US6090414A (en) * 1970-05-20 2000-07-18 Life Science Labs, Inc. Method and composition to reduce cancer incidence
US6093382A (en) * 1998-05-16 2000-07-25 Bracco Research Usa Inc. Metal complexes derivatized with folate for use in diagnostic and therapeutic applications
US6200546B1 (en) * 1997-04-22 2001-03-13 The Curators Of The University Of Missouri Gastrin receptor-avid peptide conjugates
US20020054855A1 (en) * 1997-04-22 2002-05-09 Hoffman Timothy J. Gastrin receptor-avid peptide conjugates
US20020122768A1 (en) * 2000-07-06 2002-09-05 Shuang Liu Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation thereof
US20040136906A1 (en) * 2003-01-13 2004-07-15 Enrico Cappelletti Gastrin releasing peptide compounds
US6989138B2 (en) * 2000-10-24 2006-01-24 Diatide, Inc. Stabilization of radiopharmaceutical compositions using hydrophilic thioethers and hydrophilic 6-hydroxy chromans
US7556795B2 (en) * 2002-05-03 2009-07-07 Bracco Imaging S.P.A. Radiopharmaceutical formulations

Family Cites Families (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US441181A (en) * 1890-11-25 Making peptonized meat
JPS57188527A (en) * 1981-04-21 1982-11-19 Amersham Int Plc Diagnosis of kidney function
US5169933A (en) * 1988-08-15 1992-12-08 Neorx Corporation Covalently-linked complexes and methods for enhanced cytotoxicity and imaging
US5750088A (en) * 1993-03-30 1998-05-12 The Dupont Merck Pharmaceutical Company Stable hydrazones linked to a peptide moiety as reagents for the preparation of radiopharmaceuticals
ATE233106T1 (en) * 1997-08-14 2003-03-15 Daiichi Radioisotope Lab STABLE RADIOACTIVE DRUGS
GB0015242D0 (en) * 2000-06-22 2000-08-16 Nycomed Amersham Plc Stabiliser for radiopharmaceuticals
DK1307239T3 (en) * 2000-07-28 2009-02-09 Nihon Mediphysics Co Ltd Radiopharmaceutical for diagnostic imaging containing a technetium-99m-nitride heterocomplex
FR2817259B1 (en) * 2000-11-29 2003-02-21 Cis Bio Int METAL CHELATION COMPOUND, RADIOPHARMACEUTICAL, MANUFACTURING METHOD THEREOF AND DIAGNOSTIC KIT
GB0031592D0 (en) * 2000-12-28 2001-02-07 Nycomed Amersham Plc Stabilised radiopharmaceutical compositions

Patent Citations (65)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US441184A (en) * 1890-11-25 Car-coupling
US6090414A (en) * 1970-05-20 2000-07-18 Life Science Labs, Inc. Method and composition to reduce cancer incidence
US4416865A (en) * 1973-02-20 1983-11-22 Research Corporation Radiopharmaceuticals for localization of thromboembolic disease
US4364920A (en) * 1975-04-30 1982-12-21 Medi-Physics, Inc. Stable diagnostic reagents
US4075314A (en) * 1976-04-29 1978-02-21 Mallinckrodt, Inc. Stannous pyrophosphate technetium-99m compositions
US4232000A (en) * 1978-06-28 1980-11-04 The Procter & Gamble Company Radioactive scanning agents with stabilizer
US4390517A (en) * 1979-12-19 1983-06-28 New England Nuclear Corporation Method, composition and kit for stabilizing radiolabeled compounds
US4647447A (en) * 1981-07-24 1987-03-03 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Diagnostic media
US4963344A (en) * 1981-07-24 1990-10-16 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Method to enhance NMR imaging using chelated paramagnetic ions
US4957939A (en) * 1981-07-24 1990-09-18 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Sterile pharmaceutical compositions of gadolinium chelates useful enhancing NMR imaging
US4963344B1 (en) * 1981-07-24 1992-08-25 Schering Ag
US4451451A (en) * 1981-10-30 1984-05-29 Amersham International Plc Radiopharmaceutical composition based on technetium-99m and reagent for making it
US4440738A (en) * 1982-06-10 1984-04-03 Mallinckrodt, Inc. Stable radiographic imaging agents
US4411881A (en) * 1982-07-12 1983-10-25 New England Nuclear Corporation Composition and method for stabilizing radiolabeled compounds using thiocarbonylated diethylenetriamines
US4510125A (en) * 1982-12-08 1985-04-09 Mallinckrodt, Inc. Process for making lyophilized radiographic imaging kit
US4707353A (en) * 1982-12-08 1987-11-17 Mallinckrodt, Inc. Radiographic imaging agents
US4645660A (en) * 1983-04-26 1987-02-24 Nihon Medi-Physics Co., Ltd. Increasing labeling efficiency by forming diagnostic agent in the presence of ascorbic acid or the like
US4619823A (en) * 1983-09-09 1986-10-28 Nihon Medi-Physics Co., Ltd. Radioactive iodine labeled metaraminol and diagnostic agent containing platelets labeled therewith
US4652440A (en) * 1984-05-03 1987-03-24 Paik Chang H Method of stably radiolabeling antibodies with technetium and rhenium
US5393512A (en) * 1985-01-14 1995-02-28 Vanderheyden; Jean-Luc Stable therapeutic radionuclide compositions and methods for preparation thereof
US4793987A (en) * 1985-04-26 1988-12-27 Amersham International Plc Stabilized radiolabelled compounds
US4899755A (en) * 1985-05-08 1990-02-13 The General Hospital Corporation Hepatobiliary NMR contrast agents
US6143274A (en) * 1986-01-23 2000-11-07 Tweedle; Michael F. Method for imaging and radiopharmaceutical therapy using 1-substituted-4,7,10-tricarboxymethyl-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane and analogs
US5474756A (en) * 1986-01-23 1995-12-12 Bracco International B.V. Method for imaging mammalian tissue using 1-substituted-1,4,7-tricarboxymethyl-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane and analogs
US5846519A (en) * 1986-01-23 1998-12-08 Bracco Diagnostics Inc. Method for imaging mammalian tissue using 1-substituted-1,4,7-tricarboxymethyl-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane and analogs
US4935222A (en) * 1986-06-13 1990-06-19 University Of Cincinnati Procedure for isolating and purifying radioactive ligated rhenium pharmaceuticals and use thereof and kit
US4808705A (en) * 1986-12-19 1989-02-28 Cetus Corporation Stable formulations of ricin toxin a chain and of RTA-immunoconjugates and stabilizer screening methods therefor
US5053493A (en) * 1987-04-02 1991-10-01 Centocor Cardiovascular Imaging Partners, L.P. Method for labeling antibodies with a metal ion
US4885363A (en) * 1987-04-24 1989-12-05 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. 1-substituted-1,4,7-triscarboxymethyl-1,4,7,10-tetraazacyclododecane and analogs
US5021556A (en) * 1987-07-22 1991-06-04 Neorx Corporation Method of radiolabeling chelating compounds comprising sulfur atoms with metal radionuclides
US5075099A (en) * 1988-05-31 1991-12-24 Neorx Corporation Metal radionuclide chelating compounds for improved chelation kinetics
US5362473A (en) * 1988-10-14 1994-11-08 Mallinckrodt Medical, Inc. Radiolabelled particulate composition
US5364613A (en) * 1989-04-07 1994-11-15 Sieving Paul F Polychelants containing macrocyclic chelant moieties
US5262175A (en) * 1989-05-10 1993-11-16 Solanki Kishor K Stabilization of radiopharmaceutical compositions
US5128119A (en) * 1989-06-12 1992-07-07 Immunomedics, Inc. Methods for technetium/rhenium labeling of f(ab1)2 fragments
US5118797A (en) * 1989-08-28 1992-06-02 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Rhenium tris dioxime complexes
US5387409A (en) * 1990-01-18 1995-02-07 Bracco International B.V. Boronic acid adducts of rhenium dioxime and technetium-99m dioxime complexes containing a biochemically active group
US5183653A (en) * 1990-04-13 1993-02-02 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Boronic acid adducts of metal dioxime complexes useful in labelling proteins and other amine-containing compounds
US5219556A (en) * 1990-07-09 1993-06-15 Mallinckrodt Medical, Inc. Stabilized therapeutic radiopharmaceutical complexes
US5169993A (en) * 1990-09-03 1992-12-08 Shell Research Limited Cyclohexenol derivatives
US5245018A (en) * 1990-10-31 1993-09-14 Nihon Medi-Physics Co., Ltd. Process for preparing a radiopharmaceutical composition
US5367080A (en) * 1990-11-08 1994-11-22 Sterling Winthrop Inc. Complexing agents and targeting radioactive immunoreagents useful in therapeutic and diagnostic imaging compositions and methods
US5306482A (en) * 1991-04-09 1994-04-26 Merck Frosst Canada, Inc. Radiopharmaceutical bacteriostats
US5093105A (en) * 1991-04-09 1992-03-03 Merck Frosst Canada, Inc. Radiopharmaceutical bacteriostats
US5384113A (en) * 1991-08-29 1995-01-24 Mallinckrodt Medical, Inc. Stabilizers to prevent autoradiolysis of radiolabeled peptides and proteins
US5688487A (en) * 1991-10-29 1997-11-18 Bracco International B.V. Diagnostic imaging methods using rhenium and technetium complexes containing a hypoxia-localizing moiety
US5720934A (en) * 1992-04-30 1998-02-24 Diatide, Inc. Technetium-99M labeled peptides for imaging
US5608110A (en) * 1993-06-15 1997-03-04 Bracco International B.V. Heteroatom-bearing ligands and metal complexes thereof
US5627286A (en) * 1993-06-15 1997-05-06 Bracco International B.V. Heteroatom-bearing ligands and metal complexes thereof
US5656254A (en) * 1993-06-15 1997-08-12 Bracco International B.V. Polyaza heteroatom-bearing ligands and metal complexes thereof for imaging or radiotherapy
US5665329A (en) * 1993-06-15 1997-09-09 Bracco International B.V. Heteroatom-bearing ligands and metal complexes thereof
US5780006A (en) * 1994-07-22 1998-07-14 Resolution Pharmaceuticals Inc. Peptide derived radionuclide chelators
US5976495A (en) * 1994-07-22 1999-11-02 Resolution Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Peptide derived radionuclide chelators
US5662885A (en) * 1994-07-22 1997-09-02 Resolution Pharmaceuticals Inc. Peptide derived radionuclide chelators
US6066309A (en) * 1996-02-02 2000-05-23 Rhomed Incorporated Post-labeling stabilization of radiolabeled proteins and peptides
US5919820A (en) * 1996-05-02 1999-07-06 Pharma Nord Aps Antioxidant medicament
US6027710A (en) * 1996-09-18 2000-02-22 Nihon Medi-Physiscs Co., Ltd. Radiation-protecting agent
US6200546B1 (en) * 1997-04-22 2001-03-13 The Curators Of The University Of Missouri Gastrin receptor-avid peptide conjugates
US20020054855A1 (en) * 1997-04-22 2002-05-09 Hoffman Timothy J. Gastrin receptor-avid peptide conjugates
US5886142A (en) * 1997-05-20 1999-03-23 Thomas Jefferson University Radiolabeled thrombus imaging agents
US6093382A (en) * 1998-05-16 2000-07-25 Bracco Research Usa Inc. Metal complexes derivatized with folate for use in diagnostic and therapeutic applications
US20020122768A1 (en) * 2000-07-06 2002-09-05 Shuang Liu Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation thereof
US6989138B2 (en) * 2000-10-24 2006-01-24 Diatide, Inc. Stabilization of radiopharmaceutical compositions using hydrophilic thioethers and hydrophilic 6-hydroxy chromans
US7556795B2 (en) * 2002-05-03 2009-07-07 Bracco Imaging S.P.A. Radiopharmaceutical formulations
US20040136906A1 (en) * 2003-01-13 2004-07-15 Enrico Cappelletti Gastrin releasing peptide compounds

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110250107A1 (en) * 2010-04-07 2011-10-13 Jennifer Varnedoe Column geometry to maximize elution efficiencies for molybdenum-99
US9240253B2 (en) * 2010-04-07 2016-01-19 Ge-Hitachi Nuclear Energy Americas Llc Column geometry to maximize elution efficiencies for molybdenum-99
WO2022251516A3 (en) * 2021-05-26 2023-01-26 Cornell University Complexes with acyclic chelators and their use in targeted radiotherapy of cancer

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP1654005A4 (en) 2011-06-15
JP2006528644A (en) 2006-12-21
JP5139678B2 (en) 2013-02-06
WO2005009393A3 (en) 2005-04-07
RU2006105644A (en) 2006-08-10
CN1822861A (en) 2006-08-23
CN100418585C (en) 2008-09-17
ZA200509666B (en) 2006-10-25
AU2004259028A1 (en) 2005-02-03
CA2526556A1 (en) 2005-02-03
CA2526556C (en) 2012-09-25
AU2004259028C1 (en) 2009-12-24
US20070269375A1 (en) 2007-11-22
KR20060064049A (en) 2006-06-12
JP2012158600A (en) 2012-08-23
SG177216A1 (en) 2012-01-30
EP1654005A2 (en) 2006-05-10
US20120065365A1 (en) 2012-03-15
CA2783275A1 (en) 2005-02-03
SG144160A1 (en) 2008-07-29
AU2004259028B2 (en) 2009-06-11
WO2005009393A2 (en) 2005-02-03
BRPI0412824A (en) 2006-09-26
KR101106533B1 (en) 2012-01-20
IL172059A0 (en) 2009-02-11

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
AU2004259028B2 (en) Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation
US5753206A (en) Radiometal-binding analogues of luteinizing hormone releasing hormone
ES2274517T3 (en) CONJUGADOS DE PEPTIDO-QUELATO METALICO THAT JOIN THE SOMATOSTATIN.
AU5529696A (en) Radiolabeled peptides for diagnosis and therapy
US7060247B2 (en) Gastrin receptor-avid peptide conjugates
US20060067886A1 (en) Gastrin receptor-avid peptide conjugates
US7481993B2 (en) Chelators for radioactively labeled conjugates comprising a stabilizing sidechain
US20120178906A1 (en) Chelation of metals to thiol groups using in situ reduction of disulfide-containing compounds by phosphines
EP1700608A1 (en) Chelators for radioactively labeled conjugates comprising a stabilizing sidechain
JP4318985B2 (en) Somatostatin analog derivatives and uses thereof
MXPA06000918A (en) Stable radiopharmaceutical compositions and methods for preparation
WO2021121734A1 (en) Modified grpr antagonist peptides for imaging and therapy of cancer
EP1913959A1 (en) Radioactive metal complexes comprising a tridentate complexing sequence

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: BRACCO IMAGING S.P.A., ITALY

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:CHEN, JIANQING;LINDER, KAREN E.;MARINELLI, EDMUND R.;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:026046/0749

Effective date: 20051129

STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: EXPRESSLY ABANDONED -- DURING EXAMINATION